Include errno.h, string.h, unistd.h. Don't declare errno, strerror.
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
404fa7d6
DL
1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000
2Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
6For older news, see the file ONEWS.
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
1fa28578
GM
11** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
12the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
13
14** There are new configure options associated with the support for
15images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option to list them.
6344985d 16
1fa28578
GM
17\f
18* Changes in Emacs 21.1
19
40e857ea
DL
20** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
21suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to executable-chmod.
22
c08398de
DL
23** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
24buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
25contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
26by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
27insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
28the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
29Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
30
0b8a3a6d
DL
31** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
32environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
33
34** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
35point in a pop-up window.
36
37** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
38displays all characters in that character set.
39
40** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
41coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
42
5cb6a58e
SM
43** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
44on the context.
45
a1b8d58b
GM
46** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
47
6e417ca5
DL
48** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
49been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
50
5898e075
DL
51** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
52`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
53indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
54indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
55
abfcc168
GM
56** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
57sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 58(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
59You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
60
cc181e95
GM
61** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
62on the display using several methods
63
64- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
65a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
66be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
67
68- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
69equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
70
da4496b6 71- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
72
73- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
74the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
75
0daee095 76** The new command `clone-buffer-indirectly' can be used to create
1c459486
GM
77an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
78command `clone-buffer-indirectly-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
79does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 80
176256a1 81** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
82`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
83typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 84
dd0add8e
DL
85** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
86characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
87
699238d9
GM
88** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
89compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
90this behavior.
91
92The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
93compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
94Emacs dump core.
95
96** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 97
7233c5bd
GM
98*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
99whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
100is useful for debugging X problems.
101
102Example:
103
699238d9 104 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 105
100b3cbb
GM
106*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
107visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
108the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
109and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
110visual class names are
111
112 TrueColor
113 PseudoColor
114 DirectColor
115 StaticColor
116 GrayScale
117 StaticGray
118
119Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
120`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
121meaning.
122
123The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
124supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
125`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
126visual.
127
128Example:
129
699238d9 130 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
131
132*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
133specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
134default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
135resource values are `true' or `on'.
136
137Example:
138
699238d9 139 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 140
0d0c76b8
EZ
141** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
142more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
143now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
144
42088c12 145** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 146display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
147shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
148be customized.
c60ea02e 149
31047e0d
DL
150** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
151
b02786f9
GM
152** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
153all frames except the selected one.
154
3261c1d8
DL
155** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
156to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
157
ffe36136
GM
158** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
159the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X either in the echo
160area or with tooltips.
161
559cee90
DL
162** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
163read mail from the menu etc.
164
271b4185
GM
165** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
166a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
167
0daee095
GM
168** Changes in Texinfo mode.
169
170** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
171macros
172
173 Key binding Macro
174 -------------------------
175 C-c C-c C-s @strong
176 C-c C-c C-e @emph
177 C-c C-c u @url
178 C-c C-c q @quotation
179 C-c C-c m @email
180
559cee90
DL
181** Changes in Outline mode.
182
183There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
184`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
185the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
186
404fa7d6
DL
187** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
188groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
189
8964fec7
SM
190** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer
191or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and
192several other special buffers.
193
39783d73
WP
194** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
195under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
196.emacs file.
197
198The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
199determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
200
d35fce81
GM
201** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
202abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
203`directory-abbrev-alist'.
204
df5a1902
GM
205** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
206is running in batch mode. For example,
207
208 (message "%s" (read t))
209
210will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
211to standard output.
212
a933dad1
DL
213** Faces and frame parameters.
214
215There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
216Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
217`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
218`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
219sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
220for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
221parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
222
223Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
224`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 225`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
226`default' face and vice versa.
227
f77a4a8a
GM
228** New face `menu'.
229
230The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
231Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
232attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
233
a933dad1
DL
234** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
235
236The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
237colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
238correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
239the screen gamma of a frame's display.
240
241PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
242in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
243color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
244
245The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
246`ScreenGamma'.
247
248** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
249
250The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
251Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
252oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
253of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
254the text.
255
256** Emacs has a new face implementation.
257
258The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
259font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
260height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
261These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
262specify a font.
263
264Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
265These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
266under Lisp changes, below.
267
268** New default font is Courier 12pt.
269
270** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of
271its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise,
272it is hollow.
273
274** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
275truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
276foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
277customizing face `fringe'.
278
279** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
280can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
281
282** LessTif support.
283
284Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will
285need a version 0.88.1 or later.
286
287** Toolkit scroll bars.
288
289Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
290LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
291configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
292bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
293bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
294Emacs.
295
296When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
297Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
298Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
299Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
300define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
301`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
302
303Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
304a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
305directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
306different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
307system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
308add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
309
310The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
311`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
312This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
313image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
314Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
315
316** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
317
318When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
319widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
320Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
321
322** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
323
324When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
325whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
326defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
327highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
328displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
329whitespace.
330
331** Busy-cursor.
332
333Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
334display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
335
336** Blinking cursor
337
338M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
339terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
340and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
341the group `cursor'.
342
343** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
344
345This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
346generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
347See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
348details.
349
350Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
351have to do anything to activate it.
352
353** Tabs and variable-width text.
354
355Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
356defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
357independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
358Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
359
360** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
361
362*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
363
364 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
365
79dd1637
RS
366The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
367LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 368
79dd1637
RS
369*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
370LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1
DL
371
372** Hscrolling in C code.
373
cc181e95
GM
374Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
375`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
376customized.
a933dad1
DL
377
378** Tool bar support.
379
380Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
381how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
382
383** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
384
385Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
386mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
387line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
388about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
389in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
390
391Currently, the following actions have been defined:
392
393- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
394buffers.
395
396- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
397M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
398
399- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
400
559cee90 401- Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*')
a933dad1
DL
402toggles the read-only status.
403
404- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
405
406** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
407
408When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 409from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
410non-nil.
411
412** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
413
414Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
415Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
416the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
417italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
418Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
40e857ea 419attributes like overlines, strike-through, box are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
420
421** Sound support
422
423Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
424(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
425Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
426(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
427to enable sound support.
428
429** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
430the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
431forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
432value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
433users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
434even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
435
436The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
437
438** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
439
440As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
441drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
442`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
443
444** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
445bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
446
447This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
448`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
449variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
450
451** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
452
453When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
454value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
455number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
456fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
457
458When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
459value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
460number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
461fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
462
463** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
464notably at the end of lines.
465
466All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
467spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
468
eee54b0e
DL
469There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
470
a933dad1
DL
471** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
472query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
473after each match to get the replacement text.
474
f0124b4a 475** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `E' that lets you
4ff40dd0
GM
476edit the replacement string.
477
478** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', let's
479you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
480lisp-complete-symbol.
481
a933dad1
DL
482** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
483
484If a message is longer than one line, or mini-buffer contents are
485longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the mini-window unless it is
486on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum mini-window size
487by setting the following variable:
488
489- User option: max-mini-window-height
490
491Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
492fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
493specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
494
495Default is 0.25.
496
0d43b60d
GM
497** Changes to hideshow.el
498
499Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
500selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
501
502*** Generalized block selection and traversal
503
504A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
505(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
506which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
507`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
508point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
509(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
510
511If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
512i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
513backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
514the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
515
516*** Isearch support for updating mode line
517
518During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
519blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
520line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
521portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
522is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
523
524To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
525something like this in your .emacs.
526
527 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
528 (lambda ()
529 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
530
559cee90
DL
531** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
532
533If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
534entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
535log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
536
537New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
538buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary.
eb2aac9d
GM
539
540Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
541if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
542
543The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular
544expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be
545cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of
546a file.
547
3476b54a
GM
548** Changes in Font Lock
549
550*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
551font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
552mode.
553
b3b98592
GM
554** Comint (subshell) changes
555
556Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
557and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
558
559The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
560buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
561buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
562
563The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
564M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
565the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
566
e26cec67
GM
567** Changes to Rmail mode
568
c0510d27
GM
569*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
570set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
571receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
572recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
573`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
574as correspondent.
575
576Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
577mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 578regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 579
3b55acc9
GM
580*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
581to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
582Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
583with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
584for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
585
6a1950ec
GM
586*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
587like `j'.
588
5bb6f079
RS
589*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
590specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 591digest message.
e26cec67 592
993d8b7d
DL
593*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
594in which folder to put messages automatically.
595
400a1ed0
GM
596** Changes to TeX mode
597
598The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
599`latex-mode'.
600
a933dad1
DL
601** Changes to RefTeX mode
602
603*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
604 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
605 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
606 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
607 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
608 can be edited from that buffer.
609
610*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
611 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
612 `A' to use all marked entries).
613
614*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
615 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
616
617*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
618 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
619 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
620 been cited.
621
38de9631
GM
622** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
623The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
624semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
625in column 1 are always made leaves.
626
a933dad1
DL
627** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
628has the following new features:
629
630*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
631may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
632to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
633time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
634
635*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
636feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
637file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
638compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
639pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
640defaults to 1.
641
b675095c
GM
642** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
643file names.
644
a933dad1
DL
645** Tooltips.
646
647Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
648mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
649can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
650
651Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
652variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
653the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
654tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
655
656** Customize changes
657
658*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
659`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
660cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
661
662*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
663Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
664default).
665
0ae51efb
GM
666*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
667between custom options. Example:
668
669 (defcustom default-input-method nil
670 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
671 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
672 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
673 :group 'mule
674 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
675 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
676
677This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
678current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
679first in a custom-set-variables statement.
680
a933dad1
DL
681** New features in evaluation commands
682
683The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
684modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
685print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
686customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
687eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
688
a933dad1
DL
689** Dired changes
690
691*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
692command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
693is, delete only empty directories.
694
695*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
696command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
697copy directories recursively.
698
f6737cde
GM
699*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
700in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
701the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
702
a933dad1
DL
703** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
704use the -f option when sending mail.
705
b1c609b1
GM
706** CC mode changes.
707
708Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
709current user setups (although it's believed that these
710incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
711However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
712back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
713compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
714release.
715
716*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
717When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
718variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
719take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
720is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
721settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
722possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
723Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
724
725By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
726special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
727the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
728of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
729above.
730
731Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
732when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
733function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
734call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
735then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
736values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
737only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
738function documentation for more info.
739
740The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
741especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
742with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
743intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
744such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
745is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
746configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
747global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
748
749(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
750
751**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
752This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
753
754This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
755variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
756completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
757the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
758empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
759style system.
760
761**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
762In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
763c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
764as far as possible.
765
766*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
767CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
768surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
769chapter about this in the manual.
770
771**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
772The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
773recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
774primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
775adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
776
777**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
778This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
779c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
780
781**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
782This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
783
784It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
785Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
786A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
787inside CC Mode.
788
789Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
790causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
791the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
792available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
793cc-mode/).
794
795**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
796The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
797specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
798literals.
799
800**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
801It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
802prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
803you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
804this function.
805
806*** Fixes to IDL mode.
807It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
808to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
809struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
810Thanks to Eric Eide.
811
812*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
813It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
814opening braces hangs and when they don't.
815
816**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
817
818*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
819See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
820better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
821and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
822
823*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
824previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
825the column specified by comment-column.
826
827*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
828In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
829is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
830prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
831contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
832don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
833
834*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
835instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
836arguments.
837
838*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
839
840*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
841c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
842c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
843variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
844Provan).
845
846*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
847
c407c570
GM
848** Makefile mode changes
849
850*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
851
852*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
853Fontlock mode is active.
854
87be76f6
GM
855** Isearch changes
856
c407c570
GM
857** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
858respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
859that started the search.
860
87be76f6 861*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
862selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
863
87be76f6
GM
864*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
865
d35fce81 866Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
867`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
868search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
869before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
870highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
871`secondary-selection'.
872
873The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
874will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
875Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
876using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
877usual snappy response.
878
879If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
880matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
881set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
882isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
883
35384f06
GM
884** Changes in sort.el
885
886The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 887as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
35384f06
GM
888new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default
889numeric base.
87be76f6 890
d7b511c4
GM
891** Changes to Ange-ftp
892
893*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
894names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
895sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
896
d7b511c4
GM
897*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
898ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
899
4b9347b3
GM
900** Shell script mode changes.
901
902Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
903derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
904sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
905
79214ddf
FP
906** Etags changes.
907
908*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
909
aca0be23 910*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
911possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
912{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
913This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
914a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 915
79214ddf
FP
916*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
917declarations when given the --declarations option.
918
919*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 920"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
921
922*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
923types.
924
de370c4c 925*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
926
927*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
928
929*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
930are now tagged.
931
932*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
933variables are tagged.
934
935*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
936
8dc78b52
FP
937*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
938for PSWrap.
79214ddf 939
f6737cde
GM
940** Changes in etags.el
941
3f6e4b8b
GM
942*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
943tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
944is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
945
f6737cde
GM
946*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
947the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
948
949If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
950FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
951TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
952obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
953
954TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
955
956FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
957List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
958
959A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
960
961 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
962 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
963 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
964
965*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
966of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
967
968*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
969names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
970
fbc164de
PE
971** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
972and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
973LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
974
0b8a3a6d
DL
975** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
976Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
9778859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
978There is currently no specific input method support for them.
59c1bf85 979
e33b0397
DL
980** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sqeuence-nos' to
981remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
982appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
983
984** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
985
6f8ea2ae
DL
986** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
987
c0510d27
GM
988** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignore-regexps'
989containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
990expression from that list, are not checked.
991
a933dad1
DL
992** New modes and packages
993
5cb6a58e
SM
994*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
995package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
996be more robust while offering the same functionality.
997
578979ee
GM
998*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
999facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1000separate Texinfo file.
1001
dc1178bf
SM
1002*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine
1003or by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1004provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS.
1005It comes with log-view-mode to view RCS and SCCS logs and log-edit-mode
1006used to enter checkin log messages.
1007
6abca616
EZ
1008*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1009without invoking external programs.
1010
1011The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1012and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1013`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1014is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1015Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1016
1017The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1018page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1019
5e5dff44
GM
1020*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1021authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1022
1023The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1024the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1025the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1026Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1027even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1028single step.
1029
1030On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1031matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1032probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1033contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1034
f7136ee8
GM
1035*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1036unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1037actually modifying content of a buffer.
1038
bbd9b566
GM
1039*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1040PostScript.
1041
1042Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1043
1044The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1045
1046 ; comment (until end of line)
1047 A non-terminal
1048 "C" terminal
1049 ?C? special
1050 $A default non-terminal
1051 $"C" default terminal
1052 $?C? default special
1053 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1054 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1055 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1056 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1057 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1058 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1059 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1060 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1061 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1062 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1063 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1064 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1065 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1066 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1067 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1068
1069Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1070
99453a38
GM
1071*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1072align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1073determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1074example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1075equal signs of assignments.
1076
559cee90
DL
1077*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1078paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1079
6448a6b3
GM
1080*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1081list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1082buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1083customize the package.
1084
6344985d
GM
1085*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1086
249652b1
GM
1087*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1088replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1089is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1090and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1091not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1092which answers different needs.
1093
3476b54a
GM
1094*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1095suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1096expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1097course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1098reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1099to be enabled.
1100
8964fec7
SM
1101*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1102containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1103
a933dad1
DL
1104*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1105
1106*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1107
1108*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1109
1110*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1111Pascal) language.
1112
1113*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1114the text at point.
1115
1116*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1117
8d54eb69
DL
1118*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1119
a933dad1
DL
1120*** whitespace.el ???
1121
ebcfda83
GM
1122*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1123files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1124(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1125interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1126often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1127uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1128codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1129
1130*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1131
1132Here is an example of columns:
1133
1134horse apple bus
1135dog pineapple car EXTRA
1136porcupine strawberry airplane
1137
1138Doing the following settings:
1139
1140 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1141 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1142 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1143 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1144
1145
1146Selecting the lines above and typing:
1147
1148 M-x delimit-columns-region
1149
1150It results:
1151
1152[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1153[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1154[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1155
1156delim-col has the following options:
1157
1158 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1159 before all columns.
1160
1161 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1162 between each column.
1163
1164 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1165 after all columns.
1166
1167 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1168 each column.
1169
1170delim-col has the following commands:
1171
1172 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1173 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1174
f507826c
GM
1175*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
1176were operated on recently. When enabled, a new "Open Recent" submenu
1177is displayed in the "Files" menu.
1178
1179The recent files list is automatically saved across Emacs sessions.
1180
1181To enable/disable recentf use M-x recentf-mode.
1182
1183To enable recentf at Emacs startup use
1184M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET.
1185
1186To change the number of recent files displayed and others options use
1187M-x customize-group RET recentf RET.
1188
8062f458
DL
1189*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1190text.
1191
36e24b82 1192*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1193of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1194specific to Message mode.
1195
36e24b82
DL
1196*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1197viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1198with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1199
aaa659ef
DL
1200*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1201interface to access directory servers using different directory
1202protocols. It has a separate manual.
1203
eee54b0e
DL
1204*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1205for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1206
612839b6
GM
1207*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1208
1209*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
1210minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1211
399da7e3
DL
1212*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1213with the diary features.
1214
6e417ca5
DL
1215*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1216numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1217
a933dad1
DL
1218** Withdrawn packages
1219
1220*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1221functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1222
3261c1d8
DL
1223*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1224
1225*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1226
1227\f
1228* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1229(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1230
dce6b995
GM
1231** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key
1232and event names in ange brackets.
1233
25fa6deb
GM
1234** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
1235call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
1236message; it will be truncated instead.
1237
1681ead6
GM
1238** The variable line-number-display-limit can now be set to nil,
1239meaning no limit.
1240
c08398de
DL
1241** select-safe-coding-system now also checks the most preferred
1242coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1243DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1244
80c05bd3 1245** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1246of a primitive.
1247
80c05bd3
DL
1248** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1249buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1250This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1251than replacing the local map.
1252
4bc7a543
DL
1253** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1254after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
1255
1256** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1257
a933dad1
DL
1258\f
1259* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1260
1261Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1262--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1263When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1264so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1265
0b8a3a6d
DL
1266*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
1267`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
1268when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
1269multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
1270
1271*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
1272`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
1273contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
1274
1275*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
1276changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
1277[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
1278regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
1279the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
1280extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
1281bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
1282eight-bit-graphic.
1283
1284** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
1285
1286A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
1287a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
1288character set as previously.
1289
1290*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
1291They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
1292modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
1293
1294CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
1295characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
1296range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
1297case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
1298
1299FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
1300name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
1301
1302*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
1303registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
1304"fontset-default".
1305
1306*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
1307argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
1308
1309** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
1310composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
1311buffers and strings.
1312
1313*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
1314character' which is an independent character with a unique character
1315code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
1316have been deleted: composite-char-component,
1317composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
1318composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
1319The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
1320also been deleted.
1321
1322*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
1323specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
1324`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
1325
1326*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
1327MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
1328composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
1329may differ between buffer and string text.
1330
1331*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
1332COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
1333
1334*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
1335directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
1336Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
1337`composition' from STRING.
1338
1339*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
1340a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
1341
1342*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
1343obsolete.
1344
1345** The new character set `mule-unicode-0100-24ff' is introduced for
1346Unicode characters of the range U+0100..U+24FF. Currently, this
1347character set is not used.
1348
1349** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
1350`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
1351X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
1352
1353+++
1354** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
1355are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
13560xA0..0xFF repectively.
1357
399da7e3 1358+++
f0124b4a
DL
1359** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
1360that offset in the file before writing.
1361
3bbc50af
DL
1362** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1363promised long ago.
1364
7464346d
GM
1365** The function `add-minor-mode' simplifies the definition of minor
1366modes.
1367
c94f4677 1368- Function: add-minor-mode TOGGLE NAME &optional KEYMAP AFTER TOGGLE-FUN
7464346d 1369
c94f4677
GM
1370Register a new minor mode.
1371
1372TOGGLE is a symbol which is the name of a buffer-local variable that
1373is toggled on or off to say whether the minor mode is active or not.
1374
1375NAME specifies what will appear in the mode line when the minor mode
1376is active. NAME should be either a string starting with a space, or a
1377symbol whose value is such a string.
1378
1379Optional KEYMAP is the keymap for the minor mode that will be added
1380to `minor-mode-map-alist'.
1381
1382Optional AFTER specifies that TOGGLE should be added after AFTER
1383in `minor-mode-alist'.
1384
1385Optional TOGGLE-FUN is there for compatiblity with other Emacssen.
1386It is currently not used.
7464346d 1387
612839b6
GM
1388** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1389`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1390from which the command was issued.
1391
1392** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1393`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1394`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1395additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1396operate on.
1397
271b4185
GM
1398** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1399to `window-buffer-height'.
1400
1401- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1402
1403Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1404The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1405lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1406
1407Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1408respectively.
1409
1410If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1411COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1412
1413The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1414obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1415on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1416
1417Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1418buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1419possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1420is currently displayed in some window.
1421
3c30cb6e
DL
1422** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1423argument function's results.
1424
62f20204
GM
1425** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1426signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1427
c0510d27
GM
1428** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1429header is the list of headers passed to it.
1430
1431** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1432ignores differences in case and text representation.
1433
1434** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
1435cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1436as follows:
1437
1438 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1439 nil don't display a cursor
1440 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1441 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1442 others display a box cursor.
1443
9a0dd3dc
GM
1444** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1445an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1446defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1447set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1448
d7b511c4 1449** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 1450specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
1451the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1452text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1453
1454Example:
1455
1456 (string-to-syntax "()")
1457 => (4 . 41)
1458
1fa28578
GM
1459** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1460other than 10.
1461
1462*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1463INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1464
1465 #b1111
1466 => 15
1467 #b-1111
1468 => -15
1469
1470*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1471
1472 #o666
1473 => 438
1474
1475*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
1476
1477 #xbeef
1478 => 48815
1479
1480*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
1481
1482 #2R-111
1483 => -7
1484 #25rah
1485 => 267
1486
3d4ff2dd 1487** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
e9b4e5ff
GM
1488the given property to obtain a a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
1489and isn't a string.
1490
3d4ff2dd
GM
1491** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
1492a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
1493value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
1494not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
1495
16ce590d
DL
1496+++
1497** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
1498
73825616 1499** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
1500for a regexp in a string.
1501
1502** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
1503`mouse-position-function'.
1504
723e779c
GM
1505** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
1506that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
1507
d1e103b2
GM
1508** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
1509Keywords are now always considered constants.
1510
31047e0d
DL
1511+++
1512** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
1513returns it.
1514
7a85e4df
GM
1515** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
1516returned by function `recent-keys'.
1517
02b14400
RS
1518+++
1519** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
1520can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
1521Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
1522etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
1523mode.
404fa7d6 1524
02b14400 1525+++
8964fec7
SM
1526** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
1527and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
1528
02b14400
RS
1529+++
1530** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
1531has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
1532function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
1533returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
1534been performed."
1535
1536When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
1537and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
1538hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
1539then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 1540
02b14400 1541+++
81da8b32
GM
1542** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
1543In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
1544and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
1545
02b14400 1546+++
9e207b90
GM
1547** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
1548with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
1549specified table.
1550
1551 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
1552
1553Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
1554TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
1555saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
1556what BODY returns.
9e207b90 1557
02b14400 1558+++
d7f89643 1559** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 1560Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 1561
02b14400 1562+++
dde9e75a
GM
1563** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
1564removed since it wasn't used by anything.
1565
02b14400 1566+++
9da30515
GM
1567** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
1568instead of being optional.
1569
02b14400 1570+++
d20679eb
GM
1571** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
1572modify read-only text.
1573
02b14400 1574+++
fbc164de
PE
1575** New functions and variables for locales.
1576
1577The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
1578decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
1579time functions like strftime. The new variables
1580`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
1581locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
1582
1583The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
1584environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
1585the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
1586environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
1587not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
1588`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
1589`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 1590
02b14400 1591+++
863476d1
SM
1592** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
1593To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
1594modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
1595start sequences.
1596
02b14400 1597+++
ef6d912c
GM
1598** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
1599because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
1600
02b14400 1601+++
a933dad1
DL
1602** New function `propertize'
1603
1604The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
1605strings with text properties.
1606
1607- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
1608
1609Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
1610by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
1611PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
1612specified value of that property. Example:
1613
1614 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
1615
1616+++
1617** push and pop macros.
1618
02b14400
RS
1619Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
1620are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
1621as the place that holds the list to be changed.
1622
1623(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
1624(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
1625 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
1626
02b14400
RS
1627** New dolist and dotimes macros.
1628
6c7fd5aa
RS
1629Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
1630are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
1631
1632(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
1633 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
1634 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
1635 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1636
1637(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
1638 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
1639 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
1640 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1641
a933dad1
DL
1642+++
1643** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
1644as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
1645
1646[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
1647[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
1648[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
1649[:blank:] matches space and tab only
1650[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
1651 space, and DEL.
1652[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
1653 and DEL.
1654[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
1655 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1656 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1657[:alpha:] matches letters.
1658 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1659 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1660[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
1661[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
1662[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
1663[:punct:] matches punctuation.
1664 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1665 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
1666[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
1667[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
1668[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
1669
1670+++
1671** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
1672
1673The following functions are defined for hash tables:
1674
1675- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
1676
1677The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
1678are optional. The following arguments are defined:
1679
1680:test TEST
1681
1682TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
1683Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
1684it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
1685
1686:size SIZE
1687
1688SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
1689many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
1690
1691:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
1692
1693REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
1694full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
1695size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
16961.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
1697old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
1698
1699:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
1700
1701THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
1702hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
1703(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
1704
1705:weakness WEAK
1706
1707WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t.
1708Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if
1709their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the
1710hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
1711
1712- Function: makehash &optional TEST
1713
1714Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
1715
1716- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
1717
1718Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
1719
1720- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
1721
1722Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
1723values are shared.
1724
1725- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
1726
1727Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
1728
1729- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1730
1731Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
1732
1733- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
1734
1735Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
1736
1737- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1738
1739Returns the size of TABLE.
1740
1741- Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE
1742
1743Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
1744
1745- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
1746
1747Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
1748
1749- Function: clrhash TABLE
1750
1751Clear TABLE.
1752
1753- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
1754
1755Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
1756not found.
1757
79214ddf 1758- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
1759
1760Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
1761another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
1762
1763- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
1764
1765Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
1766
1767- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
1768
1769Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
1770arguments KEY and VALUE.
1771
1772- Function: sxhash OBJ
1773
1774Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
1775
1776- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
1777
1778Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
1779a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 1780comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
1781and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
1782of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
1783
1784TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
1785
1786HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
1787code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
1788integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
1789
1790Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
1791be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
1792
1793 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
1794 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
1795
1796 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
1797 (sxhash (upcase a)))
1798
79214ddf 1799 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
1800 'case-fold-string-hash))
1801
1802 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
1803
1804+++
1805** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
1806
1807It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
1808circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
1809a cons cell which is its own cdr.
1810
1811+++
1812** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
1813
1814If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
1815#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
1816
a933dad1
DL
1817+++
1818** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
1819t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
1820specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
1821is too short to reach that column.
1822
1823+++
1824** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
1825now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
1826after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
1827two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
1828
1829If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
1830perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
1831and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
1832
1833+++
1834** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
1835to specify which buffer to return the size of.
1836
1837+++
1838** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
1839calendar-move-hook after moving point.
1840
1841+++
1842** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
1843directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
1844small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
1845small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
1846temporary-file-directory instead.
1847
1848+++
1849** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
1850the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
1851`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
1852hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
1853
1854+++
1855** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
1856elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
1857
1858+++
1859** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
1860
1861make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
1862creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
1863ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
1864
1865+++
1866** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
1867
1868The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
1869on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
1870is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
1871never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
1872ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
1873overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
1874
1875If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
1876that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
1877to get an error if the file exists at that time.
1878The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
1879
1880+++
1881** Function `format' now handles text properties.
1882
1883Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
1884If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
1885ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
1886result string.
1887
1888Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
1889string where arguments appear in the result string.
1890
1891Example:
1892
1893 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
1894 (s2 "world"))
1895 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
1896 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 1897 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
1898
1899results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
1900
1901+++
1902** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
1903
1904Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
1905The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
1906argument in it.
1907
1908 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
1909 (arg "world"))
1910 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
1911 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
1912 (message msg arg))
1913
1914+++
1915** Sound support
1916
1917Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
1918(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
1919
1920Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
1921(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
1922to enable sound support.
1923
1924Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
1925list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
1926when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
1927functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
1928sound to play, before playing the sound.
1929
1930The following sound properties are supported:
1931
1932- `:file FILE'
1933
1934FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
1935searched relative to `data-directory'.
1936
6fb40beb
GM
1937- `:data DATA'
1938
1939DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
1940may be present, but not both.
1941
a933dad1
DL
1942- `:volume VOLUME'
1943
1944VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
19450..1. This property is optional.
1946
1947Other properties are ignored.
1948
1949** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
1950
1951** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
1952a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
1953
1954** Changes to garbage collection
1955
1956*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
1957of live and free strings.
1958
1959*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
1960strings that have been consed so far.
1961
a933dad1 1962\f
04545643
GM
1963* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
1964Lisp Manual
1965
0b8a3a6d
DL
1966** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
1967satisfying one of a list of specifications.
1968
1969+++
1970** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
1971optional.
1972
04545643
GM
1973** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center'.
1974
1975When this property is specified, the image is vertically centered
1976around a centerline which would be the vertical center of text drawn
1977at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text
1978properties and overlays that apply to the image.
1979
1980\f
a933dad1
DL
1981* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
1982
1983Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1984--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1985When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1986so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1987
f6d3257b
GM
1988** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
1989to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
1990
1991Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
1992text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
1993is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
1994your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
1995laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
1996just display it black instead.
1997
1998This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
1999a line like
2000
2001 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2002
2003in your `.emacs'.
2004
a933dad1
DL
2005** New face implementation.
2006
2007Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2008font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2009
2010+++
2011*** New faces.
2012
2013Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2014
2015 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2016
a933dad1
DL
2017 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2018 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2019
a933dad1 2020 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2021
a933dad1 2022 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2023
a933dad1 2024 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2025
a933dad1 2026 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2027
a933dad1
DL
2028 7. Background color.
2029
2030 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2031
2032 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2033
2034 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2035
2036 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2037
2038 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2039 color.
2040
2041 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2042 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2043
2044Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2045same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2046frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2047faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2048with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2049attributes mentioned above.
2050
2051There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2052definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2053created frames.
79214ddf 2054
a933dad1
DL
2055A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2056have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2057`fully-specified'.
2058
2059+++
2060*** Face merging.
2061
2062The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2063combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2064aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2065properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2066that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2067results in a fully-specified face.
2068
2069+++
2070*** Face realization.
2071
2072After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2073merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2074realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2075available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2076face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2077cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2078
2079Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2080character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2081for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2082charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2083
2084Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2085specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2086being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2087the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2088statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2089
2090In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2091`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
20920x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2093the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2094initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2095Emacs.
2096
2097Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2098`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2099registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2100with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2101
2102++++
2103**** Clearing face caches.
2104
2105The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2106on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2107unused fonts.
2108
2109+++
2110*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2111
a933dad1
DL
2112Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2113given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2114for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2115
2116If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2117pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2118family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2119property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2120an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2121
2122Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2123against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2124match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2125
2126Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2127
2128The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2129attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2130face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2131names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2132that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2133width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2134to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2135
2136Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
2137specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
2138face doesn't exist.
2139
2140+++
2141**** Scalable fonts
2142
2143Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2144since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2145servers.
2146
2147To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2148`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2149scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2150Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2151scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2152that list. Example:
2153
2154 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2155
2156allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2157
2158+++
2159*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2160
2161- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2162
2163Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2164is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2165string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2166
2167If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2168the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2169FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2170POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2171SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2172These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2173if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2174REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2175the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2176of the face font sort order.
2177
79214ddf 2178- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2179
2180Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2181omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2182(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2183non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2184
2185- Variable: font-list-limit
2186
2187Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2188won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2189matching font. The default is currently 100.
2190
2191+++
2192*** Setting face attributes.
2193
2194For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2195with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2196implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2197`face-attribute'.
2198
2199Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2200symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2201
2202The following attributes are recognized:
2203
2204`:family'
2205
2206VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2207or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2208and `?' are allowed.
2209
2210`:width'
2211
2212VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2213It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2214`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2215`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2216
2217`:height'
2218
2219VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
22201/10 pt.
2221
2222`:weight'
2223
2224VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2225symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2226`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2227
2228`:slant'
2229
2230VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2231symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2232`reverse-oblique'.
2233
2234`:foreground', `:background'
2235
2236VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2237
2238`:underline'
2239
2240VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2241VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2242a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2243don't underline.
2244
2245`:overline'
2246
2247VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2248VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2249string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2250overline.
2251
2252`:strike-through'
2253
2254VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2255striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2256face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2257is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2258
2259`:box'
2260
2261VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2262around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2263VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2264of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2265and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2266VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2267:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2268the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2269specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2270defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2271the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2272color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2273should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2274like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2275that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2276the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2277box.
2278
2279`:inverse-video'
2280
2281VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2282inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2283
2284`:stipple'
2285
2286If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2287The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2288searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2289HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2290is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2291explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2292
2293For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2294and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2295
2296`:font'
2297
2298Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2299XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2300is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2301versions of Emacs.
2302
2303For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2304be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2305must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2306
2307Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2308`defface'.
2309
2310*** Face attributes and X resources
2311
2312The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2313from X resources:
2314
2315 Face attribute X resource class
2316-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2317 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2318 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2319 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2320 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2321 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2322 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2323 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2324 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2325 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2326 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2327 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2328 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2329 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2330 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2331 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2332 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2333 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2334 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2335 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2336
2337+++
2338*** Text property `face'.
2339
2340The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2341specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2342specification can be
2343
23441. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2345
23462. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2347 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2348 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2349 for face attribute names.
2350
23513. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2352 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2353 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2354
2355+++
2356** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2357
acf3ecb7
EZ
2358The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2359on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2360the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2361default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2362`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2363used to clear the mapping table.
2364
acf3ecb7
EZ
2365** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2366
2367The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2368and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2369type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2370color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2371display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2372old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2373`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2374compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2375should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2376modify their color-related behavior.
2377
2378The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2379any frame type.
2380
8a5719f0
EZ
2381** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2382
2383The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2384`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2385`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2386`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2387`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2388`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2389display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2390the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2391platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2392
a933dad1
DL
2393+++
2394** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 2395
463cac2d 2396This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
2397
2398The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2399end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2400Otherwise, it returns zero.
2401
463cac2d
GM
2402** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2403
2404There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2405buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
2406text-property.
2407
9a9dfda8 2408Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 2409forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 2410to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 2411not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
2412commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2413boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2414`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2415functions.
463cac2d
GM
2416
2417Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 2418a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 2419editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 2420
9a9dfda8
GM
2421The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2422
2423- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE
2424
2425Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
2426A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2427If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2428constrained position if that is is different.
2429
2430If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2431positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2432ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
2433constrained to the field that has the same `field' text-property
2434as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2435is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
2436fields.
2437
2438If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
2439NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
2440unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
2441C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
2442only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
2443
2444- Function: erase-field &optional POS
2445
2446Erases the field surrounding POS.
2447A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2448If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2449
2450- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2451
2452Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
2453A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2454If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2455If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at beginning of an
2456field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
2457
2458- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2459
2460Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
2461A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2462If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2463If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at end of a field,
2464then the end of the *following* field is returned.
2465
2466- Function: field-string &optional POS
2467
2468Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
2469A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2470If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2471
2472- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
2473
2474Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
2475A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2476If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2477
a933dad1
DL
2478+++
2479** Image support.
2480
2481Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
2482strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
2483(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
2484replaces the display of the characters having that property.
2485
2486If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
2487`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
2488AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
2489window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
2490area.
2491
2492IMAGE is an image specification.
2493
2494*** Image specifications
2495
2496Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
2497is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
2498specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
2499symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
2500described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
2501
2502The following is a list of properties all image types share.
2503
2504`:ascent ASCENT'
2505
576da55d
GM
2506ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
2507If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
2508to use for its ascent.
2509
2510If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
2511image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
2512
04545643
GM
2513If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
2514centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
2515of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
2516overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
2517
2518`:margin MARGIN'
2519
79214ddf 2520MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
2521margin around the image. Default is 0.
2522
2523`:relief RELIEF'
2524
2525RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
2526around an image.
2527
2528`:algorithm ALGO'
2529
2530Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
2531be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
2532supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
2533which is intended to display images "disabled."
2534
2535`:heuristic-mask BG'
2536
2537If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
2538background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
2539determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
2540corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
2541the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
2542be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
2543background of the image.
2544
2545`:file FILE'
2546
2547Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
2548search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
2549building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
2550may be present in the image specification.
2551
518df5c4
GM
2552`:data DATA'
2553
2554Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
2555supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
2556present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
2557support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
2558
a933dad1
DL
2559*** Supported image types
2560
b246b1f6 2561**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
2562
2563XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
2564properties supported are
2565
2566`:foreground FG'
2567
2568FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
2569is the frame's foreground.
2570
2571`:background FG'
2572
2573BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
2574the frame's background color.
2575
2576XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
2577case, the image specification must contain the following properties
2578instead of a `:file' property.
2579
2580`:width WIDTH'
2581
2582WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
2583
2584`:height HEIGHT'
2585
2586HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
2587
2588`:data DATA'
2589
2590DATA must be either
2591
2592 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
2593 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
2594
2595 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
2596
2597 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
2598 bitmap.
2599
c76e04a8
GM
2600 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
2601 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
2602 in the file.
2603
a933dad1
DL
2604**** XPM, image type `xpm'
2605
2606XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
2607`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
2608found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
2609`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
2610
2611Additional image properties supported are:
2612
2613`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
2614
2615SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
2616name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
2617name.
2618
2619XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
2620add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
2621
a933dad1
DL
2622The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
2623to display compressed images.
2624
2625**** PBM, image type `pbm'
2626
2627PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2628mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
2629defined.
2630
2631**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
2632
2633Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
2634package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
2635are:
2636
a933dad1
DL
2637**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
2638
2639Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
2640package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2641properties defined.
2642
2643**** GIF, image type `gif'
2644
2645Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
2646`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
2647
2648Additional image properties supported are:
2649
2650`:index INDEX'
2651
2652INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
2653multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
2654
2655This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
2656For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
2657at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
2658every 0.1 seconds.
2659
2660(defun show-anim (file max)
2661 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
2662 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
2663
2664(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
2665 (when (= idx max)
2666 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 2667 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
2668 (save-excursion
2669 (set-buffer buffer)
2670 (goto-char (point-min))
2671 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
2672 (insert-image img "x"))
2673 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
2674
2675**** PNG, image type `png'
2676
2677Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
2678package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2679properties defined.
2680
2681**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
2682
2683Additional image properties supported are:
2684
2685`:pt-width WIDTH'
2686
2687WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 2688integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
2689
2690`:pt-height HEIGHT'
2691
2692HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 2693must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
2694
2695`:bounding-box BOX'
2696
2697BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
2698the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
2699files. This is an required property.
2700
2701Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
2702lisp/gs.el.
2703
2704*** Lisp interface.
2705
79214ddf
FP
2706The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
2707which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
2708
2709Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
2710they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
2711The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
2712manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
2713images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
2714
2715*** Simplified image API, image.el
2716
2717The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
2718creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
2719can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
2720define an image based on available image types. The functions
2721`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
2722buffer.
2723
2724+++
2725** Display margins.
2726
2727Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
2728and images.
2729
2730To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
2731`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
2732`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
2733obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
2734`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
2735the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
2736of the display margins.
2737
2738You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
2739containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
2740one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
2741string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
2742in this file).
2743
2744+++
2745** Help display
2746
2747Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
2748moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
2749`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
2750that have a `help-echo' property.
2751
2752The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar
2753items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display.
2754If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is
2755evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the
2756tool-bar item is used.
2757
2758The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
2759help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the
2760help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
2761
2762+++
2763** Vertical fractional scrolling.
2764
2765The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
2766This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
2767
2768The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
2769scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
2770The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
2771scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
2772used.
2773
79214ddf
FP
2774 (global-set-key [A-down]
2775 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 2776 (interactive)
79214ddf 2777 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 2778 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 2779 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
2780 #'(lambda ()
2781 (interactive)
79214ddf 2782 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
2783 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
2784
2785+++
2786** New hook `fontification-functions'.
2787
2788Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
2789when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
2790variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
2791is called with one argument, POS.
2792
2793At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
2794characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
2795as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
2796property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
2797`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
2798
2799+++
2800** Tool bar support.
2801
2802Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
2803parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
2804controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
2805suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
2806`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
2807automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
2808
2809*** Tool bar item definitions
2810
2811Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
2812`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
2813where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 2814
a933dad1
DL
2815CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
2816evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
2817the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
2818property (see below).
79214ddf 2819
a933dad1
DL
2820BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
2821binding are currently ignored.
2822
2823The following properties are recognized:
2824
2825`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 2826
a933dad1
DL
2827FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
2828or disabled.
79214ddf 2829
a933dad1 2830`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 2831
a933dad1 2832FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 2833
a933dad1
DL
2834`:filter FUNCTION'
2835
2836FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
2837FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
2838used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 2839
a933dad1
DL
2840`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
2841
2842TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
2843and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 2844
a933dad1
DL
2845`:image IMAGES'
2846
2847IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
2848image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
2849meaning of each of the four elements:
2850
2851 Index Use when item is
2852 ----------------------------------------
2853 0 enabled and selected
2854 1 enabled and deselected
2855 2 disabled and selected
2856 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 2857
4ba7246d
GM
2858If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
2859algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
2860
a933dad1 2861`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 2862
a933dad1
DL
2863Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
2864is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
2865
2866*** Tool-bar-related variables.
2867
2868If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
2869resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
2870than 1/4 of the frame's size.
2871
79214ddf 2872If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
2873raised when the mouse moves over them.
2874
2875You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
2876`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
2877pixels. Default is 1.
2878
2879You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
2880`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
2881
2882*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
2883
2884You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 2885a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
2886
2887 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
2888 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
2889 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
2890
2891is the original tool bar item definition, then
2892
2893 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
2894
2895makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
2896item.
2897
2898** Mode line changes.
2899
2900+++
2901*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
2902
2903The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
2904that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
2905a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
2906
29071. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
2908a `local-map' text property.
2909
29102. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
2911that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
2912
29133. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
2914is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
2915`local-map' property.
2916
2917The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
2918properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
2919example.
2920
54522c9f
GM
2921*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
2922evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
2923
a933dad1
DL
2924+++
2925*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
2926variable mode-line-format to nil.
2927
2928+++
2929*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
2930
2931This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
2932`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
2933completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
2934`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
2935line.
2936
2937The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
2938`header-line'.
2939
2940The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
2941position in the header-line.
2942
2943+++
2944** Text property `display'
2945
2946The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
2947also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
2948`display' property should be a display specification, as described
2949below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
2950
2951*** Variable width and height spaces
2952
2953To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
2954specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
2955`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
2956area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
2957marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
2958displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
2959simpler form STRETCH as property value.
2960
2961The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
2962PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
2963properties described below.
2964
2965The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
2966characters having the `display' property.
2967
2968- :width WIDTH
2969
2970Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
2971character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
2972
2973- :relative-width FACTOR
2974
2975Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
2976first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
2977same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
2978width of that character by FACTOR.
2979
2980- :align-to HPOS
2981
2982Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
2983value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
2984
2985Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
2986
2987- :height HEIGHT
2988
2989Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
2990normal line height.
2991
2992- :relative-height FACTOR
2993
2994The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
2995of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
2996
2997- :ascent ASCENT
2998
2999Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3000used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
3001baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
3002equal to 100.
3003
3004You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3005
3006*** Images
3007
3008A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3009. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3010in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3011their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3012the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3013`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3014area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3015the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3016as display specification.
3017
3018*** Other display properties
3019
3020- :space-width FACTOR
3021
3022Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3023should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3024integer or float.
3025
3026- :height HEIGHT
3027
3028Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3029
3030If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3031means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3032the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3033``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3034a font is available counts as a step.
3035
3036If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3037as tall as the frame's default font.
3038
3039If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3040height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3041
3042Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3043`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3044
3045- :raise FACTOR
3046
3047FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3048font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3049raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3050amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
3051`:height' subproperty.
3052
3053*** Conditional display properties
3054
3055All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3056has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3057applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3058During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3059the text having the `display' property.
3060
3061The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3062`(:when t SPEC)'.
3063
3064+++
3065** New menu separator types.
3066
3067Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3068item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3069treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3070to specify other menu separator types.
3071
3072- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3073
3074No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3075separator occurs.
3076
3077- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3078
3079A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3080
3081- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3082
3083A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3084
3085- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3086
3087A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3088
3089- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3090
3091A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3092
3093- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3094
3095A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3096displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3097
3098- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3099
3100A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3101
3102- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3103
3104A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3105
3106- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3107
3108A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3109
3110- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3111
3112Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3113
3114- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3115
3116Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3117
3118- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3119
3120Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3121
3122- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3123
3124Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3125
3126Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
3127the corresponding single-line separators.
3128
3129+++
3130** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
3131
3132The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
3133`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
3134Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
3135that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
3136default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
3137default background is the background color of the frame, and the
3138default foreground is black.
3139
3140The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3141(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3142`ScrollBarBackground').
3143
3144Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3145settings for scroll bar colors.
3146
3147+++
3148** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3149display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3150
3151---
3152** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
3153starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
3154on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
3155line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
3156the original window start.
3157
3158---
3159** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
3160`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
3161now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
3162
3163+++
3164** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
3165
3166A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
3167`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
3168windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
3169other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
3170
3171The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
3172fixed-width and fixed-height.
3173
3174 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
3175
3176A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
3177fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
3178window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
3179change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
3180temporarily to nil, for example
3181
3182 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
3183 (enlarge-window 10))
3184
79214ddf 3185Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3186or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3187
3188** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3189terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3190to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3191overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3192horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3193support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050
DL
3194^L
3195* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
3196
3197** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
3198input.
3199
3200** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
3201
3202** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
3203
3204** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
3205only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
3206exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
3207(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
3208(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
3209
3210** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
3211been added.
3212
3213^L
3214* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
3215
3216** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
3217
e33b0397
DL
3218^L
3219* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3220
3221** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3222M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
a933dad1
DL
3223\f
3224* Changes in Emacs 20.4
3225
3226** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3227
3228You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3229Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3230`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3231
3232If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3233is the one that is used.
3234
3235** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3236the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3237Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3238separate from the command's regular output.
3239Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3240says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3241In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3242the buffer name.
3243
3244When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3245output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3246it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3247cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3248
3249** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3250the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3251is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3252created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
3253
3254** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
3255example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
3256match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
3257quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
3258
3259** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
3260now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
3261if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
3262they never ignore case.
3263
3264** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
3265under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
3266applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
3267of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
3268just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
3269convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
3270part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
3271
3272If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
3273the same format that was used in the file before.
3274
3275You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
3276`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
3277
3278** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
3279renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
3280This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
3281
3282** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
3283The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
3284buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
3285your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
3286is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
3287end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
3288Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
3289
3290The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
3291eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
3292control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
3293format. You can now customize these variables.
3294
3295** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
3296filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
3297filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
3298enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
3299
3300** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
3301in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
3302windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
3303
3304** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
3305dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
3306doesn't have any effect.
3307
3308** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
3309not one per buffer.
3310
3311** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
3312use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
3313 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
3314
3315** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
3316To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
3317`auto-show-mode' command.
3318
3319** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
3320avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
3321versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
3322choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
3323occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
3324
3325** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
3326cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
3327
3328** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
3329character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
3330feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
3331
3332** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3333the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3334interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3335and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3336
3337** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3338
3339The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3340that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3341one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3342codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3343set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3344
3345Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3346from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3347
3348IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3349equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3350a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3351`?' on other systems.
3352
3353IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3354feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3355Unix.
3356
3357Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
3358current codepage when it starts.
3359
3360** Mail changes
3361
feab4fba
GM
3362*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
3363`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
3364appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
3365non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
3366MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
3367headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
3368latin-1:
3369
3370 MIME-version: 1.0
3371 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3372 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
3373
a933dad1
DL
3374*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
3375default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
3376default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
3377sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
3378buffer-file-coding-system.
3379
3380You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
3381sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
3382mail.
3383
3384*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
3385if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
3386Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
3387list of possible coding systems.
3388
3389** CC Mode changes
3390
3391*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
3392modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
3393longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
3394docstring for details.
3395
3396*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
3397symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
3398found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
3399prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
3400lineup functions use this feature currently.
3401
3402*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
3403"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
3404
3405*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
3406"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
3407
3408*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
3409from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
3410symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
3411c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
3412anonymous classes.
3413
3414*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
3415syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
3416
3417*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
3418inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
3419support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
3420function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
3421
3422*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
3423(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
3424brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
3425c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
3426(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
3427
3428*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
3429
3430*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
3431
3432*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
3433for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
3434
3435*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
3436
3437*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
3438associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
3439This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
3440circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
3441class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
3442
3443** Gnus changes.
3444
3445*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
3446added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
3447Gnus manual for the full story.
3448
3449*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
3450before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
3451group, which is created automatically.
3452
3453*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
3454values.
3455
3456*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
3457
3458*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
3459outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
3460
3461*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
3462`C-u C-c C-c'.
3463
3464*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
3465
3466*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
3467re-highlighting of the article buffer.
3468
3469*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
3470
3471*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
3472Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
3473
3474*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
3475`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
3476
3477*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
3478control over simplification.
3479
3480*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
3481
3482*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
3483limit.
3484
3485*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
3486
3487*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
3488
79214ddf 3489*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
a933dad1
DL
3490If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
3491rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
3492
3493*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3494`a' forces normal posting method.
3495
3496*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
3497-- `W d'.
3498
3499*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
3500to a non-nil value.
3501
3502*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
3503where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
3504
3505*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
3506has been added.
3507
3508*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
3509
3510*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
3511
3512*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
3513`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
3514
3515*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
3516`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
3517
3518*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
3519
3520*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
3521been added.
3522
3523*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
3524`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
3525
3526*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
3527updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
3528
3529*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
3530
3531*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
3532
3533*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
3534
3535** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
3536
3537*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
3538options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
3539nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
3540
3541*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
3542TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
3543of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
3544TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
3545can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
3546
3547*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
3548All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
3549but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
3550the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
3551
3552*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
3553the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
3554buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
3555mismatch.
3556
3557** Changes to RefTeX mode
3558
3559*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
3560file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
3561
3562*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
3563lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
3564characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
3565removed from the label.
3566
3567*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
3568a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
3569
3570*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
3571customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
3572
3573*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
3574`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
79214ddf 3575expressions.
a933dad1
DL
3576
3577*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
3578
3579** New/deleted modes and packages
3580
3581*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
3582SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
3583
3584*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
3585editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
3586SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
3587
3588*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
3589changes with a special face.
3590
3591*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
3592this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
3593Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
3594\f
3595* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
3596
3597** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
3598This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
3599conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
3600and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
3601check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
3602
3603The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
3604Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
3605distribution when the config.bat script is run.
3606
3607** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
3608MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
3609controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
3610directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
3611Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
3612on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
3613string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
3614program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
3615printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
3616
3617** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
3618output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
3619available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
3620input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
3621temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
3622program.
3623
3624An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
3625and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
3626programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
3627automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
3628as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
3629ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
3630
3631** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
3632a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
3633MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
3634was not documented clearly before.
3635
3636** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
3637This includes Tetris and Snake.
3638\f
3639* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
3640
3641** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
3642return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
3643They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
3644meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
3645
3646** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
3647WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
3648and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
3649
3650** Changes in the file-attributes function.
3651
3652*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
3653It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
3654
3655*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
3656the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
3657integers.
3658
3659** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
3660files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
3661arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
3662file names and attributes are returned.
3663
3664** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
3665sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
3666accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
3667It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
3668returns the result.
3669
3670** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
3671to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
3672
3673** New functions for base64 conversion:
3674
3675The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
3676into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
3677performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
3678optionally.
3679
3680Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
3681job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
3682
3683**
3684The new function process-running-child-p
3685will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
3686terminal to its own child process.
3687
3688** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
3689when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
3690to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
3691itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
3692
3693** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
3694be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
3695
3696** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
3697:included is an alias for :visible.
3698
3699easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
3700easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
3701to move or copy menu entries.
3702
3703** Multibyte editing changes
3704
3705*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
3706an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
3707make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
3708work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
3709char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
3710 (setq char (sref str idx)
3711 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
3712The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
3713
3714If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
3715(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
3716 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
3717
3718*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
3719region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
3720deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
3721
3722 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
3723
3724This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
3725across the boundary.
3726
3727*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
3728`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
3729 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
3730 contains 8-bit characters.
3731 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
3732 contains invalid characters.
3733
3734*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
3735text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
3736preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
3737text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
3738way.
3739
3740*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
3741If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
3742end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
3743prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
3744
3745*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
3746compose Thai characters in a string.
3747
3748** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
3749argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
3750for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
3751menus should always use the third argument.
3752
3753** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
3754read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
3755arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
3756input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
3757
3758** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
3759of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
3760programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
3761inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
3762
3763** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
3764the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
3765returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
3766echo area contents.
3767
3768 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
3769
3770** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
3771NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
3772requested feature cannot be loaded.
3773
3774** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
3775foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
79214ddf 3776means to clear out that attribute.
a933dad1
DL
3777
3778** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
3779gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
3780
3781** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
3782read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
3783unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
3784end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
3785
3786** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
3787the gap of the current buffer.
3788
3789** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
3790to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
3791current buffer.
3792
3793** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
3794facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
3795These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
3796it back in after any modifications have been made.
3797\f
3798* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
3799
3800** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
3801the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
3802/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
3803directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
3804subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
3805
3806Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
3807names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
3808Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
3809which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
3810these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
3811
3812Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
3813starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
3814time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
3815
3816This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
3817Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
3818to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
3819subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
3820`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
3821results.
3822
3823** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
3824GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
3825that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
3826fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
3827\f
3828* Changes in Emacs 20.3
3829
3830** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
3831including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
3832it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
3833perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
3834
3835** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
3836specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
3837region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
3838further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
3839command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
3840within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
3841are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
3842region.
3843
3844In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
3845selective undo.
3846
3847** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
3848unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
3849buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
3850effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
3851Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
3852
3853The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
3854though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
3855-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
3856load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
3857
3858** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
3859no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
3860enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
3861something that most users not do.
3862
3863** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
3864operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
3865The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
3866applications.
3867
3868C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
3869pasting operations.
3870
3871** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
3872setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
3873like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
3874printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
3875`ps-printer-name'.
3876
3877** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
3878minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
3879any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
3880except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
3881incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
3882hits a new word.
3883
3884Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
3885Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
3886to be confused by TeX commands.
3887
3888You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
3889correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
3890clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
3891of various alternative replacements and actions.
3892
3893Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
3894the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
3895corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
3896alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
3897flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
3898
3899Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
3900flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
3901
3902** Changes in input method usage.
3903
3904Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
3905the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
3906respectively.
3907
3908You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
3909
3910If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
3911of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
3912
3913The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
3914that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
3915
3916 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
3917
3918 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
3919
3920 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
3921 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
3922
3923 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
79214ddf 3924 given in the following case:
a933dad1
DL
3925 o When you are using a complex input method.
3926 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
3927
3928If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
3929input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
3930and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
3931setting it to t is helpful.
3932
3933The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
3934
3935In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
3936keys:
3937 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
3938 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
3939 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
3940These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
3941environment.
3942
3943** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
3944names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
3945minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
3946get
3947
3948 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
3949
3950which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
3951
3952Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
3953Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
3954
3955** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
3956at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
3957its owner and group.
3958
3959** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
3960Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
3961
3962** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
3963contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
3964
3965** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
3966which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
3967in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
3968by the left edge of the rectangle.
3969
3970** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
3971increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
3972C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
3973for writing keyboard macros.
3974
3975** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
3976files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
3977frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
3978the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
3979additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
3980info.
3981
3982** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
3983
3984** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
3985query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
3986contents only.
3987
3988** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
3989confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
3990the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
3991says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
3992
3993** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
3994non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
3995literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
3996
3997** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
3998now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
3999Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
4000inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
4001
4002** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4003failure if the command produces no output.
4004
4005** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4006manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4007the mouse.
4008
4009** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4010mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4011function and variable names.
4012
4013** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4014reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4015file-coding-system-alist.
4016
4017** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4018t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4019converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4020the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4021according to the current fontset.
4022
4023** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4024
4025The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4026that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4027nonascii-insert-offset.
4028
4029For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4030enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4031nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4032characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4033
4034** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4035an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4036
4037** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4038letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4039
4040** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4041are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4042command keys.
4043
4044** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4045user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4046
4047Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4048user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4049all variables that have documentation.
4050
4051** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4052shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4053that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4054minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4055it should show; the default is 20.
4056
4057Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4058the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4059of your input.
4060
4061** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4062all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4063recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4064argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4065the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4066Newly added options are included as well.
4067
4068If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4069then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4070for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4071
4072This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4073Customize menu.
4074
4075** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4076the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4077
4078** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4079buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4080invoked.
4081
4082** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4083that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4084The default is 1.
4085
4086** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4087syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4088new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4089(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4090sensibly.
4091
4092** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4093
4094** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4095value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4096two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4097
4098** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4099reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4100for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4101every night.
4102
7464346d
GM
4103** Desktop changes
4104
4105*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
a933dad1
DL
4106the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4107
7464346d
GM
4108*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4109and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4110
a933dad1
DL
4111** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4112read and post multi-lingual articles.
4113
4114** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4115doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4116be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4117outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4118the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
79214ddf 4119made invisible again.
a933dad1
DL
4120
4121** Mail reading and sending changes
4122
4123*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4124the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
4125changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
4126toggle.
4127
4128*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
4129now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
4130summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
4131the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
4132rmail-default-body-file.
4133
4134*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
4135longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
4136handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
4137
4138*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
4139it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
4140is evaluated to insert the signature.
4141
4142*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
4143outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
4144handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
4145putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
4146transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
4147especially interested in trying feedmail.
4148
4149feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
4150feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
4151provided by feedmail are:
4152
4153**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
4154stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
4155there is also a queue for draft messages
4156
4157**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
4158be prompted for confirmation
4159
4160**** does smart filling of address headers
4161
4162**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
4163the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
4164can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
4165
4166**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
4167the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
4168/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
4169function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
4170
4171** Dired changes
4172
4173*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
4174files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
4175
4176*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
4177run Dired on the directory name at point.
4178
4179*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
4180files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
4181for a specified regexp.
4182
4183** VC Changes
4184
4185*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
4186conveniently.
4187
4188*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
4189faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
4190Dired.
4191
4192VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
4193directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
4194listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
4195currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
4196
4197You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
4198then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
4199vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
4200control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
4201on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
4202
4203All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
4204is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
4205`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
4206the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
4207`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
4208
4209The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4210toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
79214ddf 4211VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
a933dad1
DL
4212`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4213
4214Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4215ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4216command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4217
4218*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4219file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4220session to resolve them.
4221
4222Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4223resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4224contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4225uses as well).
4226
4227*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4228command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4229you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4230either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4231branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4232If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4233using ediff.
4234
4235** Changes in Font Lock
4236
4237*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4238are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4239use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4240unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4241compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4242
4243** Frame name display changes
4244
4245*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4246frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4247raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4248when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4249
4250*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4251frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4252menu.
4253
4254** Comint (subshell) changes
4255
4256*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
4257subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
4258with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
4259
4260*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
4261
4262C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
4263that is, the line after the last line you got.
4264You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
4265
4266C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
4267send the current line together with the following line, when you send
4268the following line.
4269
4270C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
4271which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
4272previously sent input.
4273
4274C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
4275it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
4276as the search string.
4277
4278*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
4279automatically in compilation-mode windows.
4280
4281** C mode changes
4282
4283*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
4284and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
4285assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
79214ddf 4286definition.
a933dad1
DL
4287
4288*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
4289(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
4290Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
4291style is still the default however.
4292
4293*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
4294
4295*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
4296are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
4297them. They do not have key bindings by default.
4298
4299*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
4300and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
4301
4302*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
4303namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
4304
4305*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
4306makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
4307
4308*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
4309c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
4310
4311*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
4312should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
4313package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
4314variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
4315
4316** Changes to hippie-expand.
4317
79214ddf 4318*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
a933dad1
DL
4319non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
4320which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
4321
4322*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
4323non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
4324expanding dynamically.
4325
4326*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
4327non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
4328
4329*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
4330non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
4331this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
4332expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
4333
4334*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
4335
4336** Changes in BibTeX mode.
4337
4338*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4339bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4340automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4341bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4342against the first word in the title.
4343
4344*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4345capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4346bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
79214ddf 4347lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
a933dad1 4348lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
79214ddf 4349bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
a933dad1
DL
4350
4351*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4352generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4353replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4354bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4355
4356** Changes in vcursor.el.
4357
4358*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
4359and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
4360variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
4361entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
4362`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
4363in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
4364
4365*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
4366Editing group once the package is loaded.
4367
4368*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
4369generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
4370vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
4371
4372*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
4373vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
4374
4375** Ispell changes.
4376
79214ddf
FP
4377*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
4378buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
a933dad1
DL
4379are identified by syntax tables in effect.
4380
4381*** Generic region skipping implemented.
4382A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
4383and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
4384defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
79214ddf 4385include:
a933dad1
DL
4386
4387 o URLs are automatically skipped
4388 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
4389
4390*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
4391
4392** Changes to RefTeX mode
4393
4394RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
4395large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
4396re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
4397section `Optimizations' in the manual.
4398
4399*** New recursive parser.
4400
4401The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
4402entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
4403recursive parser scans the individual files.
4404
4405*** Parsing only part of a document.
79214ddf 4406
a933dad1
DL
4407Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
4408partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
4409the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
4410
4411 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
4412
4413*** Storing parsing information in a file.
4414
4415This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
4416
4417 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
4418
4419*** Using multiple selection buffers
4420
4421If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
4422for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
4423
4424 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
4425
4426*** References to external documents.
4427
4428The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
4429documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
4430documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
4431macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
4432RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
4433the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
4434The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
4435
4436*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
4437
4438The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
4439and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
4440
4441Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
4442the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
4443
4444*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
4445
4446The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
4447buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
4448
4449*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
4450
4451The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
4452contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
4453`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
4454have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
4455enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
4456at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
4457more.
4458
4459*** Support for the varioref package
4460
4461The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
4462
4463*** New hooks
4464
4465Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
4466and citations are created. These hooks are
4467`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
4468`reftex-format-cite-function'.
4469
4470*** Citations outside LaTeX
4471
4472The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
4473a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
4474
4475*** Short context is no longer fontified.
4476
4477The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
4478fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
4479fontified, use
4480
4481 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
4482
4483** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
4484With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
4485the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
4486directories that contain the same file name.
4487
4488Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
4489Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
4490file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
4491Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
4492have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
4493names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
4494directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
4495directory.
4496
4497** New modes and packages
4498
4499*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
4500It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
4501it, but some do not.
4502
4503*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
4504code.
4505
4506*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
4507current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
4508around in a buffer.
4509
4510Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
4511
4512*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
4513uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
4514be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
4515established system of notation similar to Chess.
4516
4517*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
4518documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
4519guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
4520
4521*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
4522available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
4523system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
4524simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
4525functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
4526the like.
4527
4528*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
4529identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
4530
4531*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
4532within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
4533used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
4534the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
4535
4536*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
4537
4538 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
4539 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
4540 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
4541 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
4542 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
4543 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
4544 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
4545 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
4546 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
4547 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
4548 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
4549
4550 Platform-specific modes:
4551
4552 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
4553 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
4554 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
4555 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
4556 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
4557 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
4558 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
4559 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
4560 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
4561\f
4562* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4563
4564** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
4565use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
4566That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
4567Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
4568
4569Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
4570you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
4571consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
4572
4573** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
4574and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
4575specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
4576searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
4577
4578** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
4579multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
4580character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
4581environment.
4582
4583** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
4584take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
4585string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
4586current input method for reading this one event.
4587
4588** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
4589now control whether to output certain characters as
4590backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
4591non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
4592characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
4593in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
4594\f
4595* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4596
4597** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
4598of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
4599
4600** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
4601in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
4602always increases point by 1.
4603
4604The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
4605considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
4606
4607See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
4608
4609** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
4610Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
4611default value changed. For example,
4612
4613 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
4614 :type 'integer
4615 :group 'foo
4616 :version "20.3")
4617
79214ddf 4618 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
a933dad1
DL
4619 :version "20.3")
4620
4621If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
4622default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
4623is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
4624`:version' in the top level group.
4625
4626This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
4627
4628** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
4629starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
4630
4631However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
4632symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
4633support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
4634to themselves.
4635
4636If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
4637this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
4638values whatever.
4639
4640** There is a new debugger command, R.
4641It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
4642in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
4643
4644** Frame-local variables.
4645
4646You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
4647the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
4648local bindings for that variable.
4649
4650These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
4651frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
4652modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
4653parameter name.
4654
4655Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
4656Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
4657active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
4658that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
4659
4660It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
4661clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
4662very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
4663through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
4664
4665** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
4666"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
4667evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
4668makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
4669See the documentation in sregex.el.
4670
4671** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
4672is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
4673parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
4674The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
4675
4676** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
4677If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
4678
4679** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
4680known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
4681define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
4682
4683** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
4684when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
4685it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
4686history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
4687
4688The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
4689return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
4690empty input.
4691
4692** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
4693for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
4694`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
4695Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
4696`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
4697
4698** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
4699echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
4700a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
4701default password to use if the user enters nothing.
4702
4703** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
4704specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
4705function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
4706place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
4707non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
4708
4709** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
4710If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
4711up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
4712end of the window, even if this requires computation.
4713
4714** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
4715which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
4716If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
4717
4718** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
4719holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
4720was directed to display this buffer.
4721
4722** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
4723with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
4724describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
4725other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
4726set-window-configuration.
4727
4728** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
4729window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
4730positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
4731windows and the choice of buffers to display.
4732
4733** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
4734override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
4735look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
4736
4737If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
4738non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
4739map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
4740
4741minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
4742and it is meant to be set by major modes.
4743
4744** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
4745except that it discards all text properties from the result.
4746
4747** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
4748USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
4749floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
4750
4751** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
4752to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
4753in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
4754it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
4755
4756** Menu changes
4757
4758*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
4759keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
4760better supported.
4761
4762The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
4763a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
4764you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
4765can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
4766then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
4767
4768*** A new format for menu items is supported.
4769
4770In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
4771 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
4772defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
4773starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
4774
4775The format is:
4776 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
4777 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
4778where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
4779string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
4780The supported properties include
4781
4782:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4783 item is enabled.
4784:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4785 item should appear in the menu.
79214ddf 4786:filter FILTER-FN
a933dad1
DL
4787 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
4788 which will be REAL-BINDING.
4789 It should return a binding to use instead.
4790:keys DESCRIPTION
4791 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
4792 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
4793 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
4794:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
4795 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
4796 keyboard binding.
4797:key-sequence nil
4798 This means that the command normally has no
4799 keyboard equivalent.
4800:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
4801:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
4802 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
4803 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
4804 value says whether this button is currently selected.
4805
4806Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
4807Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
4808
4809(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
4810
4811** New event types
4812
4813*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
4814mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
4815corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
4816which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
4817
4818 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
4819
4820where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4821same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
4822indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
4823negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
4824the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
4825forward, away from the user.
4826
4827As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4828
4829*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
4830files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
4831and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
4832filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
4833loaded into Emacs. The format is:
4834
4835 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
4836
4837where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4838same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
4839that were dragged and dropped.
4840
4841As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4842
4843** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
4844
4845*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
4846any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
4847to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
4848
4849*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
4850can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
4851that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
4852
4853*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
4854in Emacs 19 and before.
4855
4856The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
4857The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
4858
4859*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
4860buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
4861unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
4862representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
4863
4864This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
4865as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
4866viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
4867one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
4868will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
4869
4870This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
4871representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
4872(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
4873consistent with the new representation.
4874
4875*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
4876representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
4877about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
4878however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4879
4880The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
4881nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
4882using the table nonascii-translation-table.
4883
4884*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
4885representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
4886representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4887
4888The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
4889loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
4890is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
4891
4892*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4893which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
4894
4895*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4896which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
4897
4898*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
4899portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
4900so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
4901You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
4902
4903*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
4904it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
4905
4906*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
4907convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
4908buffer or string being searched.
4909
4910One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
4911[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
4912searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
4913searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
4914obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
4915you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
4916expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
4917
4918*** Structure of coding system changed.
4919
4920All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
4921by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
4922which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
4923as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
4924vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
4925your own alias name of a coding system by the function
4926define-coding-system-alias.
4927
4928The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
4929the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
4930access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
4931pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
4932character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
4933safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
4934'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
4935`iso-8859-1'.
4936
4937Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
4938The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
4939coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
4940(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
4941
4942Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
4943also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
4944are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
4945the other character sets and read it back correctly.
4946
4947*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
4948proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
4949This function requires a user interaction.
4950
4951*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
4952find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
4953select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
4954systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
4955a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
4956select-safe-coding-system.
4957
4958*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
4959decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
4960last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
4961was done.
4962
4963*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
4964used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
4965coding systems used by some specific language environment.
4966
4967*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
4968return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
4969characters are found, they now return a list of single element
4970`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
4971
4972*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
4973coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
4974coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
4975converted.
4976
4977*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
4978coding system for communicating with other X clients.
4979
4980*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
4981character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
4982character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
4983each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
4984either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
4985range of characters.
4986
4987*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
4988Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
4989
4990*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
4991in the current buffer at position POS.
4992
4993*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
4994input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
4995function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
4996character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
4997event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
4998binding input-method-function to nil.
4999
5000The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
5001method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
5002input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5003the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5004not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5005
5006The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5007subsequent events of a key sequence.
5008
5009*** You can customize any language environment by using
5010set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5011
5012The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5013customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5014instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5015environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5016exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5017\f
5018* Changes in Emacs 20.1
5019
5020** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5021options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5022at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5023tree structure.
5024
5025M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5026user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5027
5028With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5029session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5030in your .emacs file.)
5031
5032** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5033You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5034
5035** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5036This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5037
5038** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5039immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5040kills the region.
5041
5042The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5043delete the character before point, as usual.
5044
5045** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5046on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5047by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5048
5049** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5050insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5051the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5052onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5053history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5054past.)
5055
5056** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5057This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5058in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5059TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5060makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5061
5062As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5063and is an alias for it.
5064
5065If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5066use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5067
5068** Scrolling changes
5069
5070*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5071position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5072
5073In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5074on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5075where it started.
5076
5077*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5078move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5079screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5080does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5081
5082*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5083top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5084comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5085recenters the window.
5086
5087** International character set support (MULE)
5088
5089Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5090including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5091Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5092Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5093features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5094MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5095
5096Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5097coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5098character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5099variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5100into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5101
5102Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5103generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5104supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5105language, to make it possible to type them.
5106
5107The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5108character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5109
5110The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5111to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5112
5113You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5114
5115 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5116
5117Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5118characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5119argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5120already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5121characters for their work until they want to change.
5122
5123*** Input methods
5124
5125An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
5126specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
5127has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
5128the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
5129support several input methods.
5130
5131The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
5132another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
5133work.
5134
5135A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
5136characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
5137composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
5138consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
5139sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
5140letter.
5141
5142The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
5143by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
5144First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
5145marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
5146mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
5147
5148None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
5149they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
5150phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
5151converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
5152
5153Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
5154word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
5155typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
5156the first guess is wrong.
5157
5158*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
5159turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
5160
5161If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
5162byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
5163they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
5164the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
5165
5166However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
5167use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
5168includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
5169translate automatically to and from either one.
5170
5171*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
5172
5173Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
5174file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
5175sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
5176what you want.
5177
5178If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
5179example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
5180system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
5181multibyte characters in that buffer.
5182
5183If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
5184character conversion as well.
5185
5186*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
5187
5188A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
5189Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
5190requires using many fonts.
5191
5192Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
5193collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
5194
5195A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
5196the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
5197have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
5198you would use a font.
5199
5200If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
5201specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
5202display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
5203
5204The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
5205(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
5206characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
5207or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
5208and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
5209
5210*** Defining fontsets.
5211
5212Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5213chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5214with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5215
5216Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5217of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5218`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5219standard fontset are created automatically.
5220
5221If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5222argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5223FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5224with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5225name is `fontset-startup'.
5226
5227Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5228The resource value should have this form:
5229 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5230FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5231 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5232 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5233 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5234The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5235of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5236CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5237FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5238
5239Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5240last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5241You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5242
5243For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5244font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5245following resource,
5246 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5247the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5248 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5249Here is the substitution rule:
5250 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5251 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5252 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
5253 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
5254 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
5255
5256The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
5257fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
5258that function explicitly to create a fontset.
5259
5260With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
5261like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
5262name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
5263fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
5264fontsets.
5265
5266*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
5267defaults for a particular choice of language.
5268
5269Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
5270method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
5271visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
5272already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
5273language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
5274system for new files that you create.
5275
5276It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
5277set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
5278whole Emacs session.
5279
5280For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
5281chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
5282with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
5283
5284*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
5285specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
5286specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
5287the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
5288coding systems that Emacs supports.
5289
5290*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
5291lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
5292This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
5293After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
5294is used for *the immediately following command*.
5295
5296So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
5297write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
5298
5299If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
5300then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
5301
5302For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
5303visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
5304
5305*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
5306construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
5307to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
5308specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
5309of the file.
5310
5311*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
5312the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
5313code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
5314translated into that character code.
5315
5316This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
5317various countries to support the languages of those countries.
5318
5319By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
5320
5321*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
5322the coding system for keyboard input.
5323
5324Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
5325with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
5326some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
5327
5328By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
5329
5330Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
5331input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
5332translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
5333to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
5334designed to work with terminals.
5335
5336*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
5337specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5338This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5339has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5340translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5341in the corresponding buffer.
5342
5343By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5344
5345*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5346to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5347It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5348
5349*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5350an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5351command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5352want to use.
5353
5354C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5355method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5356
5357*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
5358layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
5359remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
5360which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
5361
5362*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
5363the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
5364related information.
5365
5366*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
5367HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
5368scripts.
5369
5370*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
5371information about the support for a particular language.
5372You specify the language as an argument.
5373
5374*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
5375the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
5376first dash.
5377
5378A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
5379(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
5380whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
53811 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
5382
5383 A alternativnyj (Russian)
5384 B big5 (Chinese)
5385 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
5386 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
5387 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
5388 E euc-japan (Japanese)
5389 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5390 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
5391 K euc-korea (Korean)
5392 R koi8 (Russian)
5393 Q tibetan
5394 S shift_jis (Japanese)
5395 T lao
5396 T tis620 (Thai)
5397 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
5398 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5399 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
5400 v viqr (Vietnamese)
5401 z hz (Chinese)
5402
5403When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
5404two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
5405coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
5406keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
5407
5408*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
5409conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
5410
5411When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
5412into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
5413rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
5414Rmail files themselves.
5415
5416*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
5417conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
5418
5419Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
5420for sending mail:
5421
5422- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
5423- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
5424- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
5425 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
5426- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
5427
5428*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
5429to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
5430Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
5431translations.
5432
5433** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
5434of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
5435insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
5436without any conversion.
5437
5438** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
5439You can now specify any number of octal digits.
5440RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
5441any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
5442
5443** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
5444functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
5445
5446Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
5447Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
5448
5449Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
5450mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
5451
5452** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
5453complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
5454in the buffer before point.
5455
5456With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
5457symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
5458you are using.
5459
5460With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
5461just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
5462
5463** File locking works with NFS now.
5464
5465The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
5466in the same directory as FILENAME.
5467
5468This means that collision detection between two different machines now
5469works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
5470can become a bottleneck.
5471
5472The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
5473does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
5474create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
5475file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
5476rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
5477so useful that the change is worth while.
5478
5479When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
5480are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
5481collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
5482tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
5483
5484** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
5485it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
5486show-paren-mode.
5487
5488** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
5489selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
5490delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
5491
5492** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
5493within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
5494complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
5495
5496** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
5497it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
5498set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
5499
5500** Changes in View mode.
5501
5502*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
5503Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
5504
5505*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
5506view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
5507
5508*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
5509previous state.
5510
5511*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
5512scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
5513
5514*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
5515non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
5516not just the selected window.
5517
5518*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
5519read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
5520turns View mode on or off.
5521
5522*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
5523how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
5524delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
5525
5526** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
5527now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
5528
5529** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
5530has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
5531presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
5532which version to compare with.
5533
5534** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
79214ddf 5535blocks if a match is inside the block.
a933dad1
DL
5536
5537The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
5538is outside the block. By customizing the variable
5539isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
5540shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
5541
5542By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
5543of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
5544blocks, all of them or none.
5545
5546** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
5547current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
5548confirmation first.
5549
5550** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
5551now changes the major mode according to that file name.
5552However, the mode will not be changed if
5553(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
5554(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
5555 not suitable for ordinary files, or
5556(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
5557
5558This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
5559
5560However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
5561these commands do not change the major mode.
5562
5563** M-x occur changes.
5564
5565*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
5566it performs a case-sensitive search.
5567
5568*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
5569if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
5570using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
5571
5572** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
5573in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
5574window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
5575that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
5576buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
5577
5578** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
5579after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
5580appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
5581come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
5582
5583** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
5584selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
5585buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
5586
5587** Outline mode changes.
5588
5589*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
5590
5591*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
5592
5593** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
5594you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
5595Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
5596was already active.
5597
5598The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
5599unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
5600get confused by it.
5601
5602If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
5603set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
5604
5605** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
5606
5607*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
5608conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
5609character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
5610including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
5611
5612The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
5613mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
5614copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
5615
5616*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
5617are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
5618values.
5619
5620`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
5621case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
5622`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
5623case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
5624
5625** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
5626certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
5627can be. The default value is 30.
5628
5629** Changes in Mail mode.
5630
5631*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
5632Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
5633composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
5634`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
5635`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
5636behavior.
5637
5638C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
5639compose-mail-other-frame.
5640
5641*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
5642the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
5643replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
5644buffer that shows the original message.
5645
5646*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
5647with separator lines around the contents.
5648
5649*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
5650in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
5651definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
5652need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
5653
5654*** New features in the mail-complete command.
5655
5656**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
5657for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
5658controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
5659Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
5660
5661**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
5662to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
5663/etc/passwd.
5664
5665**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
5666to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
5667/etc/passwd.
5668
5669** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
5670special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
5671directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
5672reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
5673
5674Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
5675when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
5676be taken to be magic.
5677
5678** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
5679files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
5680available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
5681
5682M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
5683(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
5684
5685** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
5686suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
5687
5688In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
5689
5690new key dired.el binding old key
5691------- ---------------- -------
5692 * c dired-change-marks c
5693 * m dired-mark m
5694 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
5695 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
5696 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
5697 * u dired-unmark u
5698 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
5699 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
5700 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
5701 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
5702 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
5703 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
5704
5705** Rmail changes.
5706
5707*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
5708saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
5709chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
5710each time you run it.
5711
5712*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
5713whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
5714
5715*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
5716messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
5717means to move in the opposite direction.
5718
5719*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
5720you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
5721
5722*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
5723just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
5724It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
5725can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
5726for output.
5727
5728** Gnus changes.
5729
5730*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
5731
79214ddf
FP
5732*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
5733Gnus.
a933dad1 5734
79214ddf 5735*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
a933dad1
DL
5736`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
5737
5738*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
5739article mode line.
5740
5741*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
5742
5743*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
5744
5745(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
5746
5747*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
5748are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
5749`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
5750
5751*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
5752
5753*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
5754
5755*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
5756See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
5757
5758*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
5759Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
5760used to pick articles.
5761
5762*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
5763another have been added.
5764
5765 `M-x gnus-change-server'
5766
5767*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
5768generating lines in buffers.
5769
5770*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
5771`M-C-_'.
5772
5773*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
5774
5775*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
5776
5777 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
5778
5779*** Scores can be decayed.
79214ddf 5780
a933dad1
DL
5781 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
5782
5783*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
5784Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
5785
5786*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
5787the native server.
5788
5789 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
5790
5791*** A new command for reading collections of documents
5792(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
5793
5794*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
5795
5796*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
5797even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
5798
5799*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
5800(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
5801
5802 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
5803 a group.
5804
5805*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
5806sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
5807
5808 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
5809
5810*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
5811
5812 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
5813
5814*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
79214ddf 5815
a933dad1
DL
5816 Use the `Y c' command.
5817
5818*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
5819
5820*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
5821
5822 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
5823
5824*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
5825from incoming mail before saving the mail.
79214ddf 5826
a933dad1
DL
5827 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
5828
5829*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
5830
5831*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
5832the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
5833
5834 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
5835
5836Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
5837and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
5838from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
5839hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
5840this issue.)
5841
5842Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
5843automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
5844particular news group. This can be done by:
5845
5846 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
5847
5848Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
5849of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
5850"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
5851system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
5852for reading and posting).
5853
5854CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
5855 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
5856Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
5857newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
5858there.
5859
5860Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
5861default. Here are some of these default settings:
5862
5863 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
5864 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
5865 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
5866 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
5867 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
5868
5869When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
5870the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
5871
5872** CC mode changes.
5873
5874*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
5875code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
5876values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
5877this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
5878Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
5879loaded.
5880
5881If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
79214ddf 5882Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
a933dad1 5883style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
79214ddf
FP
5884share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
5885c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
a933dad1
DL
5886must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
5887
5888*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
5889of the current buffer.
5890
5891*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
5892it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
5893of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
5894
5895*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
5896style that the Python developers like.
5897
5898*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
5899This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
5900just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
5901
5902** VC Changes [new]
5903
5904** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
5905name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
5906directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
5907
5908This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
5909master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
5910developers.
5911
5912You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
5913RET in a buffer visiting that file.
5914
5915*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
5916other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
5917writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
5918calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
5919
5920*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
5921version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
5922
5923** Calendar changes.
5924
5925A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
5926of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
5927for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
5928
5929** ps-print changes
5930
79214ddf 5931There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
a933dad1
DL
5932
5933*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
5934
5935The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
5936formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
5937`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
5938`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
5939It defaults to `letter'.
5940If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
5941
5942The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
79214ddf 5943of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
a933dad1
DL
5944non-nil means "landscape" mode.
5945
5946The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
5947It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
79214ddf 5948It defaults to 1.
a933dad1
DL
5949
5950*** Horizontal layout
5951
5952The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
5953`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
5954All are measured in points.
5955
5956*** Vertical layout
5957
5958The vertical layout is determined by the variables
5959`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
5960All are measured in points.
5961
5962*** Headers
5963
5964If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
5965`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
5966margin above the text.
5967
79214ddf 5968If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
a933dad1
DL
5969framing box is printed around the header.
5970
5971The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
5972`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
5973
79214ddf
FP
5974The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
5975`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
a933dad1
DL
5976`ps-header-font-size'.
5977
5978*** Font managing
5979
5980The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
5981used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
5982`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
5983elements to this alist.
5984
79214ddf 5985The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
a933dad1
DL
5986for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
5987
5988** hideshow changes.
5989
5990*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
79214ddf 5991C++, ; for lisp).
a933dad1
DL
5992
5993*** Support for java-mode added.
5994
5995*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
5996in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
5997
5998*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
5999the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
6000way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
6001
6002*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6003robust and a lot faster.
6004
79214ddf 6005*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
a933dad1
DL
6006
6007*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6008to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6009documentation for more details.
6010
6011** Changes in Enriched mode.
6012
6013*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6014filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6015of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6016use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6017the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6018
6019*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6020distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6021as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6022as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6023
6024** Font Lock mode
6025
6026*** Custom support
6027
6028The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6029font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6030faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6031group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6032your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6033consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6034
6035You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6036
6037*** Maximum decoration
6038
6039Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6040default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6041of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6042supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6043to get the old behavior.
6044
6045*** New support
6046
6047Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6048
6049Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6050support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6051
6052*** Configurable support
6053
6054Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6055additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6056c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6057java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6058list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6059of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6060convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6061
6062Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6063way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6064it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6065
6066*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6067
6068You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6069highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6070for any mode.
6071
6072For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6073
6074 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6075
6076in your ~/.emacs.
6077
6078*** New faces
6079
6080Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6081font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6082distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6083to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6084
6085*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6086
6087The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6088cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6089same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6090
6091*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6092
6093The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6094according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6095the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6096non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6097refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6098the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6099Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6100
6101This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6102For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6103this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6104refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6105containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6106the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6107
6108As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6109
6110Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6111Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6112Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6113new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6114
6115If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6116settings.
6117
6118** Ada mode changes.
6119
6120*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6121If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6122procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6123you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6124stubs.
6125
6126*** There are two new commands:
6127 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
6128 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
6129
6130The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
6131`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
79214ddf 6132`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
a933dad1
DL
6133
6134*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
6135is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
6136Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
6137
6138*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
6139formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
6140places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
6141space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
6142
6143** Scheme mode changes.
6144
6145*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
6146mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
6147for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
6148with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
6149have any effect.
6150
6151If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
6152still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
6153scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
6154variables as buffer-local variables.
6155
6156*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
6157Use M-x dsssl-mode.
6158
133c9e59
GM
6159** Changes to the emacsclient program
6160
875c1439
GM
6161*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
6162USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
6163associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
6164can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
6165
133c9e59 6166*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
a933dad1
DL
6167it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
6168buffer in Emacs.
6169
133c9e59
GM
6170*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
6171use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
6172ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
6173option takes precedence.
6174
a933dad1
DL
6175** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
6176constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
6177(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
6178
6179** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
6180which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
6181the current defun.
6182
6183** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
6184following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
6185
6186** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
6187and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
6188necessary).
6189
6190** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
6191if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
6192these register values no longer become completely useless.
6193If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
6194asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
6195it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
6196
6197** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
6198example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
6199be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
6200you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
6201
6202You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
6203variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
6204file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
6205revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
6206only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
6207
6208** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
6209since it applies only to the current frame.
6210
6211** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6212file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6213and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6214
6215This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6216multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6217variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6218tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6219instead of just the file you are editing.
6220
6221** RefTeX mode
6222
6223RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6224and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6225different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6226multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6227turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6228
79214ddf 6229C-c ( reftex-label
a933dad1
DL
6230 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6231 knows which kind of label is needed.
6232
6233C-c ) reftex-reference
6234 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6235 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6236
6237C-c [ reftex-citation
6238 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6239 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6240
6241C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6242 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6243
6244C-c = reftex-toc
6245 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6246 can quickly jump to every section.
79214ddf 6247
a933dad1
DL
6248Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6249commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6250Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6251reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6252C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
6253
6254** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6255
6256*** Info documentation is now available.
6257
6258*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
6259both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
6260
6261*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
6262bibtex-user-optional-fields.
6263
6264*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
6265(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
6266
6267*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
6268entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
6269appropriate functions.
6270
6271*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
6272entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
6273
6274*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
6275been cleaned.
6276
6277*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
6278bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
6279
6280*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
6281shall be delimited.
6282
6283*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
6284bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
6285bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
6286
6287*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
6288field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
6289prefixed with `ALT'.
6290
6291*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
6292bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
6293formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
6294documentation).
6295
6296*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
6297documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
6298for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
6299
6300*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
6301comma should be inserted at end of last field.
6302
6303*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
6304alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
6305signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
6306
6307*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
6308
6309*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
6310
6311*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
6312from alien sources.
6313
6314*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
6315to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
6316crossref entries.
6317
6318*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
6319region.
6320
6321*** Added support for imenu.
6322
6323*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
6324of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
6325`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
6326`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
6327
6328*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
6329from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
6330
6331** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
6332
30a009a5 6333** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
047f434a 6334
a933dad1
DL
6335** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
6336functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
6337Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6338as an argument.
6339
6340When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6341and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6342
6343** browse-url changes
6344
6345*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6346Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6347(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6348non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6349customization variables.
6350
6351*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6352
6353*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6354lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6355(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6356
6357** Changes in Ediff
6358
6359*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
6360pops up the Info file for this command.
6361
6362*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
6363the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
6364merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
6365directories).
6366
6367*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
6368and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
6369files in the same directory.
6370
6371*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
6372The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
6373related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
6374
6375** Changes in Viper
6376
6377*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
79214ddf 6378*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
a933dad1
DL
6379 instead of vip-.
6380*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
79214ddf 6381*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
a933dad1
DL
6382Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
6383*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
6384*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
6385*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
6386color when Viper is in insert state.
6387*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
6388Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
6389viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
6390
6391** Etags changes.
6392
6393*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
6394default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
6395Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
6396variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
6397not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
6398
6399*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
6400
6401*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
6402constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
6403
6404*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
6405recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
6406In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
6407
6408*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
6409C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
6410recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
6411methods and protocols.
6412
6413*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
6414.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
6415column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
6416paragraph name.
6417
6418*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
6419an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
6420at least M times and as many as N times.
6421
6422** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
6423in files has changed slightly.
6424
6425With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
6426time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
6427This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
6428with old time-stamp-format values.
6429
6430In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
6431(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
6432This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
6433reasons.
6434
6435In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
6436natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
6437fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
6438(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
6439time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
6440specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
6441
6442Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
6443case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
6444truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
6445
6446The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
6447being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
6448future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
6449recommended now will continue to work then.
6450
6451See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
6452details.
6453
6454** There are some additional major modes:
6455
6456dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
6457m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
6458meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
6459
6460** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
6461copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
6462into Emacs.
6463
6464** New Lisp packages include:
6465
6466*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
6467
6468*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
6469be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
6470
6471*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
6472
6473*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
6474in shell buffers.
6475
6476*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
6477See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
6478and `elint-defun'.
6479
6480*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
6481meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
6482ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
6483strings or comments.
6484
6485These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
6486abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
6487you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
6488insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
6489at these points.
6490
6491*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
6492can visit them by short forms of their names.
6493
6494*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
6495Emacs Lisp function at point.
6496
6497*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
6498
6499*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
6500switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
6501
6502*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
6503
6504*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
6505
6506*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
6507
6508*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
6509from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
6510
6511*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
6512You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
6513inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
6514original place after inserting the copy.
6515
6516*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
6517on the buffer.
6518
6519You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
6520velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
6521(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
6522
6523Enable mouse-drag with:
6524 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
6525-or-
6526 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
6527
6528*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
6529mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
6530
6531*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
6532It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
6533
6534*** ogonek
6535
6536The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
6537Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
6538platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
6539TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
6540ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
6541prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
6542instance) and vice versa.
6543
6544To use this package load it using
6545 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
6546Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
79214ddf 6547 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
a933dad1
DL
6548 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
6549The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
6550ways of customization in `.emacs'.
6551
6552*** Interface to ph.
6553
6554Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
6555
6556The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
6557services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
6558these servers.
6559
6560*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
6561
6562*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
6563You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
6564while the real cursor does not move.
6565
6566*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
6567for visiting your favorite web sites.
6568
6569*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
6570so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
6571
6572** movemail change
6573
6574Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
6575mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
6576supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
6577user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
6578
6579This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
6580\f
6581* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
6582
6583** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
6584
6585Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
6586end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
6587Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
6588file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
6589file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
6590
6591To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
6592C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
6593coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
6594specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
6595LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
6596save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
6597\f
6598* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
6599
6600** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
6601Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
6602vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
6603Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
6604
6605** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
6606to start with w32- instead of win32-.
6607
6608In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
6609don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
6610"win".
6611
6612** Basic Lisp changes
6613
6614*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
6615evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
6616
6617*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
6618be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
6619or by the user.
6620
6621The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
6622
6623*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
6624
6625(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
6626(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
6627
6628*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
6629usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
6630its argument.
6631
6632*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
6633
6634*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
6635
6636*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
6637
6638*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
6639error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
6640include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
6641`format' function.
6642
6643*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
6644or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
6645whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
6646
6647*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
6648either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
6649adding one of these suffixes.
6650
6651*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
6652which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
79214ddf 6653If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
a933dad1
DL
6654
6655We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
6656because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
6657
6658*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
6659
6660*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
6661You must load the `cl' library to define it.
6662
6663*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
6664conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
6665
6666 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
6667
6668BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
6669BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
6670
6671*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
6672choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
6673restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
6674works using `save-current-buffer'.
6675
6676*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
6677write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
6678of the last form.
6679
6680*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
6681which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
6682last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
6683as the last form.
6684
6685*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
6686characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
6687matches.
6688
6689For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
6690
6691*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
6692with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
6693Then it returns that string.
6694
6695For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
6696
6697(with-output-to-string
6698 (princ "The buffer is ")
6699 (princ (buffer-name)))
6700
6701returns "The buffer is foo".
6702
6703** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
6704is non-nil.
6705
6706These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
6707buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
6708characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
6709
6710*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
6711a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
6712
6713Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
6714character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
6715Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
6716position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
6717characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
6718 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
6719
6720ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
6721Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
6722non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
6723characters".
6724
6725The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
6726through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
6727"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
6728range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
6729leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
6730
6731*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
6732(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
6733multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
6734character, which may be more than one buffer position.
6735
6736This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
6737always one buffer position, need to be changed.
6738
6739However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
79214ddf 6740
a933dad1
DL
6741*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
6742because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
6743have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
6744the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
6745guaranteed.
6746
6747*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
6748between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
6749character).
6750
6751When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
6752
6753 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
6754 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
6755 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
6756 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
6757 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
6758
6759*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
6760
6761*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
6762`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
6763more than the number of characters.
6764
6765You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
6766it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
6767\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
6768is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
6769follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
6770newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
6771
6772*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
6773and returns a string containing those characters.
6774
6775*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
6776(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
6777counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
6778character, sref signals an error.
6779
6780*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
6781in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
6782string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6783
6784*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
6785in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
6786region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6787
6788*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
6789the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
6790to a vector of the characters in it.
6791
6792*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
6793of a string. You call it as follows:
6794
6795 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
6796
6797This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
6798STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
6799This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
6800Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
6801it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
6802
6803*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
6804if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6805
6806*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
6807if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6808
6809*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
6810to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
6811not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
6812which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
6813
6814(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
6815
6816This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
6817
6818The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
6819If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
6820are not included in the resulting value.
6821
6822The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
6823at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
6824WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
6825is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
6826
6827If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
6828place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
6829character extends across that column), then the padding character
6830PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
6831string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
6832column START-COLUMN.
6833
6834*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
6835the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
6836necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
6837difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
6838changed text, before the change.
6839
6840*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
6841sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
6842one character set for each script, not for each language.
6843
6844**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
6845
6846**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
6847
6848**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
6849set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
6850
6851**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
6852name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
6853which identify the character within that character set.
6854
6855**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
6856byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
6857opposite of split-char.
6858
6859**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
6860of all the characters between BEG and END.
6861
6862**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
6863of all the characters in a string.
6864
6865*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
6866and specifying coding systems.
6867
6868**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
6869system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
6870of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
6871(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
6872and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
6873as what to do about code conversion.)
6874
6875**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
6876name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
6877
6878**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6879for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6880except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
6881
6882Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6883which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
6884to match against a file name.
6885
6886VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6887a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6888decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6889to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6890systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6891specifies the coding system for encoding.
6892
6893If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6894or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6895
6896**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
6897the coding system to use for network sockets.
6898
6899Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6900which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
6901either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
6902service names.
6903
6904VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6905a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6906decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6907to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6908systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6909specifies the coding system for encoding.
6910
6911If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6912or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6913
6914**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6915for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6916except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
6917start the subprocess.
6918
6919**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
6920systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
6921when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
6922(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
6923to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
6924
6925**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
6926coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
6927subprocess.
6928
6929It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
6930but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
6931start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
6932connection permanently or until overridden.
6933
6934The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
6935file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
6936network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
6937coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
6938It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
6939system for one operation at a time.
6940
6941**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
6942files, subprocesses or network connections.
6943
6944**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
6945coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
6946The value is a cons cell,
6947 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
6948where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
6949the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
6950input to the subprocess.
6951
6952**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
6953change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
6954
6955** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
6956customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
6957you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
6958
6959You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
6960variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
6961information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
6962legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
6963customization.
6964
6965Thus, instead of writing
6966
6967 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
6968 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
6969
6970you would now write this:
6971
6972 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
6973 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
6974 :type 'boolean
6975 :group foo)
6976
6977The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
6978two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
6979describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
6980for a description of them.
6981
6982The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
6983should belong to. You define a new group like this:
6984
6985 (defgroup ispell nil
6986 "Spell checking using Ispell."
6987 :group 'processes)
6988
6989The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
6990group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
6991but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
6992to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
6993second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
6994
6995Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
6996package should have just one group; a more complex package should
6997have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
6998package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
6999first-level subgroups.
7000
7001** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
7002
7003This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7004separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7005
7006** easy-mmode
7007
7008The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7009developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7010only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7011predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7012`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7013`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7014
7015** Text property changes
7016
7017*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7018text property.
7019
7020*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7021previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7022place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7023functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7024starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7025
7026If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7027LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7028of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7029position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7030
7031*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7032value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7033is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7034
7035** Changes in invisibility features
7036
7037*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7038hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7039is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7040should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7041would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7042make the overlay visible.
7043
7044During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7045invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7046needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7047which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7048the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7049t when it should hide it.
7050
7051*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7052
7053Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
79214ddf
FP
7054invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7055and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
a933dad1 7056Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
79214ddf 7057manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
a933dad1
DL
7058Here is an example of how to do this:
7059
7060 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
79214ddf 7061 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
a933dad1 7062 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
79214ddf 7063 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
a933dad1
DL
7064
7065 ...
7066 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7067
7068 ...
7069 ;; When done with the overlays:
7070 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7071 ;; Or respectively:
7072 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7073
7074** Changes in syntax parsing.
7075
7076*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7077`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7078obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7079`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7080
7081If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7082is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7083used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7084
7085When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7086character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7087
7088 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7089 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7090
7091 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7092 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7093 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7094
7095 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7096 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7097 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7098 determine the syntax type of the character.
7099
7100 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7101 of the current buffer.
7102
7103*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7104value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7105for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7106
7107*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7108and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7109only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7110character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7111another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7112
7113These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7114text property.
7115
7116*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7117arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7118of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7119
7120*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7121(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7122element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7123nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7124string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
7125
7126*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
7127syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
7128`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
7129
7130** Changes in face features
7131
7132*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
7133if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
7134
7135*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
7136of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
7137
7138*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
7139set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
7140
7141*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
7142set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
7143
7144*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
7145by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
7146and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
7147the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
7148overlay property).
7149
7150This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
7151arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
7152
7153** Changes in file-handling functions
7154
7155*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
7156directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
7157they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
7158is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
7159
7160This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
7161begins with ~.
7162
7163*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
7164it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
7165
7166*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
7167the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
7168
7169*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
7170as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
7171
7172*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
7173character code conversion as well as other things.
7174
7175Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
7176(formerly it did not).
7177
7178*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
7179environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
7180
7181*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
7182instead of constant strings.
7183
7184*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
7185to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
7186any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
7187
7188substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
7189in the same way as before.
7190
7191*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
7192The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
7193which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
7194
7195*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
7196error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
7197else, and returns nil.
7198
7199*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
7200directory cannot be listed.
7201
7202** Changes in minibuffer input
7203
7204*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
7205read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
7206additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
7207argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
7208ways:
7209
7210 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7211 It is available through the history command M-n.
7212
7213*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7214read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7215argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7216minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7217enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7218
7219In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7220argument in this way.
7221
7222*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7223from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7224minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7225
7226** Echo area features
7227
7228*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7229echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7230minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7231after the echo area is cleared.
7232
7233*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7234in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7235
7236** Keyboard input features
7237
7238*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7239set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7240
7241*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7242received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7243by keyboard macros.
7244
7245** Frame-related changes
7246
7247*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7248creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7249hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7250
7251*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7252the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
7253has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
7254
7255*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7256selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
7257value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
7258in the selected frame.
7259
7260*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
7261is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
7262which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
7263
7264** X Windows features
7265
7266*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
7267x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
7268x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
7269
7270*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
7271The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
7272
7273*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
7274MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
7275A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
7276
7277If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
7278it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
7279
7280** Subprocess features
7281
7282*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
7283functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
7284automatically.
7285
7286*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
7287and returns the output from the command as a string.
7288
7289*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
7290and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
7291
7292** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
7293does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
7294
7295** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
7296at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
7297goes after the other menu items.
7298
7299** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
79214ddf 7300of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
a933dad1
DL
7301around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
7302are in use.
7303
7304The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
7305series of several changes--if that seems safe.
7306
7307Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
7308after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
7309form.
7310
7311** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
7312is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
7313but its hook is still run.
7314
7315** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
7316for errors that are handled by condition-case.
7317
7318If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
7319regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
7320useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
7321
7322This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
7323are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
7324filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
7325warned.
7326
7327** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
7328way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
7329
7330** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
7331integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
7332functions like display-time.
7333
7334** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
7335name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
7336
7337** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7338can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7339is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7340
7341** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7342if there is an error in compilation.
7343
7344** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7345switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7346argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7347they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7348
7349** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7350Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7351the *scratch* buffer.
7352
7353** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7354The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7355where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7356e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7357
7358** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
7359and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
7360It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
7361
7362** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
7363using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
7364variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
7365and compose-mail-other-frame.
7366
7367** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
7368can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
7369full name of the specified user will be returned.
7370
7371** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
7372of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
7373where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
7374in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
7375option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
7376files at all.
7377
7378** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
7379and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
7380width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
7381the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
7382
7383For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
7384minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
7385with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
7386is how %S normally pads to two positions.
7387
7388** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
7389
7390** imenu.el changes.
7391
7392You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
79214ddf 7393item from menu created by imenu.
a933dad1
DL
7394
7395An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
7396#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
7397select one of those items.
7398\f
7399* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
7400\f
7401* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
7402
7403** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
7404mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
7405
7406** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
7407use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
7408Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
7409\f
7410* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
7411
7412** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
7413To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
7414
7415** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7416conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
7417matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
7418expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
7419word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
7420all caps.
7421
7422** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
7423at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
7424
7425When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
7426does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
7427as in previous Emacs versions.
7428
7429** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
7430non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
7431time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
7432frames.
7433
7434** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
7435if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
7436This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
7437Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
7438accident.
7439
7440** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
7441keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
7442It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
7443line and then executing the macro.
7444
7445This command is not new, but was never documented before.
7446
7447** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
7448(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
7449characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
7450characters.
7451
7452** Font Lock mode
7453
7454*** Font Lock support modes
7455
7456Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
7457below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
7458hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
7459to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
7460Font Lock mode is enabled.
7461
7462For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
7463
7464 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
7465
7466in your ~/.emacs.
7467
7468*** lazy-lock
7469
7470The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
7471only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
7472becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
7473Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
7474occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
7475buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
7476Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
7477
7478To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
7479
7480 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
7481
7482To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
7483
7484** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7485
7486*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
7487paren and key.
7488
7489*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
7490supported.
7491
7492** Gnus changes.
7493
7494Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
7495commands and variables have been added. There should be no
7496significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
7497previously released version, except in the message composition area.
7498
7499Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
7500between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
7501
79214ddf 7502*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
a933dad1
DL
7503variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
7504obsolete.
7505
7506*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
7507missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
7508
7509 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
7510
7511*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
7512
7513 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
7514
7515*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
79214ddf 7516referred.
a933dad1
DL
7517
7518*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
7519
7520 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
7521
7522*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
7523
7524 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
7525
7526*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
79214ddf 7527buffers.
a933dad1
DL
7528
7529 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
7530
7531*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
7532
7533 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
7534
7535*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
7536
7537 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
7538
7539*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
7540
7541 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
7542
7543*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
7544is possible.
7545
7546 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
7547
7548*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
7549groups of groups.
7550
7551*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
7552
7553*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
79214ddf 7554batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
a933dad1
DL
7555
7556*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
7557
7558*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
7559
7560*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
7561
7562 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
7563
7564*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
7565expiration times.
7566
7567*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
7568
7569*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
7570process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
7571
7572*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
7573articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
7574bound to keys on the `/' submap.
7575
7576*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
7577articles with the `*' command.
7578
7579*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
7580
7581*** Article headers can be buttonized.
7582
7583 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
7584
7585*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
7586
79214ddf 7587*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
a933dad1
DL
7588`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
7589
7590*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
79214ddf 7591buffer.
a933dad1
DL
7592
7593*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
7594
7595*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
7596
7597*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
7598
7599 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
7600
79214ddf 7601*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
a933dad1
DL
7602
7603 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
7604
79214ddf 7605*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
a933dad1
DL
7606
7607*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
7608
79214ddf 7609*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
a933dad1 7610
79214ddf 7611 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
a933dad1
DL
7612 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
7613
7614*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
79214ddf 7615refetching.
a933dad1
DL
7616
7617 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
7618
7619*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
7620buffer to allow easier treatment.
7621
7622*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
7623
7624*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
7625
7626 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
7627
7628*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
79214ddf 7629articles.
a933dad1
DL
7630
7631 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
7632
79214ddf 7633*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
a933dad1
DL
7634
7635*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
7636cited text to hide is now customizable.
7637
7638 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
7639
7640*** Boring headers can be hidden.
7641
7642 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
7643
7644*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
7645
7646*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
7647
7648The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
7649in greater detail.
7650\f
7651* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
7652
7653** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
7654second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
7655asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
7656exists.
7657
7658** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
7659as well as lists.
7660
7661** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
7662of a given keymap.
7663
7664** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
7665given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
7666keymap or nil.
7667
7668** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
7669an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
7670name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
7671menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
7672equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
7673alias.
7674\f
7675* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
7676
7677** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
7678
7679Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
7680This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
7681was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
7682far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
7683pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
7684
7685For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
7686you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
7687`http://www.vtw.org/'.
7688
7689** A note about C mode indentation customization.
7690
7691The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
7692do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
7693It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
7694much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
7695chapter of the manual for details.
7696
7697However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
7698customization variables take effect.
7699
7700** Marking with the mouse.
7701
7702When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
7703highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
7704using M-x transient-mark-mode.
7705
7706** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
7707
7708*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
7709
7710*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
7711to work on NT only and not on 95.)
7712
7713*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
7714in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
7715you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
7716application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
7717applications, these problems are significant.
7718
7719If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
7720likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
7721However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
7722will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
7723other DOS application as a subprocess.
7724
7725Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
7726You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
7727
7728If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
7729subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
7730have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
7731Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
7732separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
7733Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
7734
7735** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
7736
7737This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
7738which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
7739minibuffer contains.
7740
7741** `title' frame parameter and resource.
7742
7743The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
7744It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
7745It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
7746affects just the displayed title of the frame.
7747
7748The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
7749it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
7750and also serves as the default for the displayed title
7751when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
7752
7753** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
7754enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
7755
7756** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
7757F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
7758Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
7759
7760If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
7761menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
7762something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
7763the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
7764
7765 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
7766
7767** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
7768to replace the characters it "deletes".
7769
7770** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
7771
7772** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
7773a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
7774select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
7775It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
7776immediately after the selected one.
7777
7778This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
7779made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
7780
7781** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
7782
7783Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
7784directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
7785If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
7786Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
7787recover-session.
7788
7789You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
7790auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
7791will not work.
7792
7793Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
7794normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
7795this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
7796bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
7797now that the bug is fixed.
7798
7799** Changes to Version Control (VC)
7800
7801There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
7802when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
7803Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
7804which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
7805
7806If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
7807telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
7808VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
7809the link is visited and a warning displayed.
7810
7811** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
7812Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
7813is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
7814
7815There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
7816Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
7817enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
7818The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
7819remain normal.
7820
7821** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
7822header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
7823
7824Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
7825known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
7826offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
7827Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
7828
7829Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
7830of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
7831a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
7832name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
7833documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
7834`mail-directory-stream'.)
7835
7836** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
7837skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
7838characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
7839with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
7840
7841Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
7842- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
7843wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
7844
7845The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
7846less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
7847headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
7848Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
7849Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
7850fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
7851to a limitation in font-lock).
7852
7853External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
7854
7855** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
7856buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
7857buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
7858this example:
7859
7860 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
7861 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
7862
7863** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7864
7865*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
7866
7867*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
7868
7869*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
7870
7871*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
7872entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
7873will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
7874isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
7875(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
7876The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
7877
7878*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
7879does the same job.
7880
7881*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
7882"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
7883
7884*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
7885text.
7886
7887** Font Lock mode
7888
7889*** Global Font Lock mode
7890
7891Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
7892new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
7893font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
7894turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
7895on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
7896
7897For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
7898
7899 (global-font-lock-mode t)
7900
7901in your ~/.emacs.
7902
7903*** Local Refontification
7904
7905In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
7906However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
7907those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
7908command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
7909
7910In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
7911(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
7912current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
7913above and below point.
7914
7915With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
7916
7917** Follow mode
7918
7919Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
7920buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
7921side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
7922they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
7923split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
7924follow-mode.
7925
7926M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
7927
7928To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
7929command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
7930
7931** hide-show changes.
7932
7933The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
7934to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
7935normal hooks.
7936
7937** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
7938The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
7939
7940** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
7941recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
7942those that begin a function, record, or macro.
7943
7944** MSDOS Changes
7945
7946*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
7947Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
7948
7949*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
7950and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
7951
7952*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
7953
7954*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
7955pressing both mouse buttons.
7956
7957*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
7958restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
79214ddf 7959are:
a933dad1
DL
7960
7961**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
7962now works.
7963
7964**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
7965
7966**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
7967implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
7968
7969**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
7970
7971**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
7972
7973**** `M-x recover-session' works.
7974
7975**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
7976
7977**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
7978\f
7979* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
7980
7981** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
7982tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
7983remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
7984this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
7985behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
7986
7987** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
7988
7989The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
7990not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
7991need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
7992be different.
7993
7994It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
7995than `system-type'.
7996
7997See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
7998
7999** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
8000now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
8001
8002** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8003that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8004
8005** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8006no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8007reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8008
8009The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8010to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8011like this:
8012
8013 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8014
8015SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8016It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8017becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8018
8019REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8020seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8021means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8022
8023*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8024up if too much time passes.
8025
8026 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8027
8028This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8029If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8030of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8031form in BODY.
8032
8033*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8034a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8035call looks like this:
8036
8037 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8038
8039SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8040runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8041timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8042ARGS.
8043
8044Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8045command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8046command.
8047
8048REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8049time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8050does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8051each time Emacs becomes idle.
8052
8053If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8054idle for SECS seconds.
8055
8056*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8057all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8058programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8059instead.
8060
8061*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8062there is no answer within a certain time.
8063
8064 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8065
8066asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8067within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8068Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8069
8070** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8071arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8072meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8073arguments in between are ignored.
8074
8075This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8076the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8077
8078** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8079/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8080/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8081site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8082version.
8083
8084It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8085version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8086for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8087has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8088and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8089problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8090
8091** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8092.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8093systems with limited file name syntax.
8094
8095Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8096convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8097for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8098completions.el:
8099
8100(defvar save-completions-file-name
8101 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8102 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8103
8104This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8105depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8106convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8107Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8108MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8109
8110** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8111rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8112minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8113
8114** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8115marker from its buffer position.
8116
8117** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8118Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8119The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8120
8121** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8122that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8123condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8124of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
8125matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
8126regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
8127
8128This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
8129errors that happen often during editing.
8130
8131** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
8132into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
8133puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
8134
8135** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
8136now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
8137
8138** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
8139a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
8140name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
8141to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
8142and not get-buffer-window.
8143
8144** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
8145calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
8146being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
8147
8148If you use this feature, you should set the variable
8149buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
8150property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
8151non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
8152are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
8153property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
8154over and over for the same text.
8155
8156** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
8157
8158*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
8159in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
8160
8161;; @(#) HEADER: text
8162;; $HEADER: text $
8163
8164in addition to the normal
8165
8166;; HEADER: text
8167
8168*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
8169checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
8170lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
8171\f
8172* For older news, see the file ONEWS.
8173
8174----------------------------------------------------------------------
8175Copyright information:
8176
404fa7d6 8177Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
8178
8179 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8180 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8181 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8182 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8183
8184 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8185 of this document, or of portions of it,
8186 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8187 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
8188\f
8189Local variables:
8190mode: outline
8191paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
8192end: